manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 Series, Service Manual

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 Series Service Manual Download Page 406

Backup target data

Backup method

User

Service

DCM

Power OFF

(excluding DCM)

Restriction on the use of Quick Menu

Yes*3

Yes*8

Yes*9

-

Main menu setting items
Main menu button settings

-

-

Yes*9

-

Settings of buttons at the top of the screen

-

-

Yes*9

-

Main menu wallpaper settings

-

-

Yes*9

-

Other main menu settings

-

-

Yes*9

-

Mail Box Settings
Mail Box Settings (Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto
Delete, Print When Storing from Printer Driver)

Yes*4

-

Yes*9

-

Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox

Yes*4

-

-

-

Network place registration information

-

-

Yes*9

Yes*10

Web browser settings
Web browser setting information

-

-

Yes*9

-

MEAP settings
MEAP applications

-

Yes*8

-

-

MEAP application license files

Yes*5

-

-

-

Data saved using MEAP applications

Yes*5

Yes*8

-

-

Password of SMS (Service Management Service)

-

Yes*8

-

-

Universal data settings
Unsent documents

-

-

-

-

Job log information

-

-

-

-

Audit log

Yes*6

-

-

-

Key and certificate registered in Management Settings >
Device Management > Certificate Settings

-

-

Yes*9

-

Auto gradation adjustment setting values

-

-

-

-

PS font

-

-

-

-

Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is
OFF

-

-

-

-

Key and settings information to be used for encryption
when TPM is ON

Yes*7

-

-

-

Service mode settings
Service mode setting values (MN-CON)

-

-

Yes*9

Yes*10

*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export
*2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management > User
Management
*3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export
*4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up/Restore
*5: Remote UI > Service Management Service
*6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log
Exported audit logs cannot be restored back to the export source device.
*7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings
*8: Download Mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3]: MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin
Backup is possible using SST or USB flash drive
The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function.
*9: Backup using DCM
Service mode setting values can be backed up and restored by the following procedure from Remote UI / Local UI / WebService
only when COPIER>OPTION>USER>SMD-EXPT is set to ON.

1. Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All
2. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All
3. Service mode top screen > BACKUP

Service mode setting values only can be backed up and restored.

4. Web Service

*10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash
PCB.

5. Adjustment

394

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 Series

Page 1: ...Revision 7 0 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 C3325 C3320 Series Service Manual ...

Page 2: ...g or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual ma...

Page 3: ... door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal me...

Page 4: ...when Tightening a Screw 5 1 Product Overview 6 Product Lineup 7 Positioning 7 Host machine 7 Option 8 Features 11 Product Features 11 Features 11 Specifications 17 Specifications 17 Weight and Size 18 Productivity 19 Paper type 19 Pickup 20 Parts Name 26 Cross Sectional View 26 Control Panel 26 2 Technology 27 Basic Configuration 28 Functional Configuration 28 Document Exposure 29 Overview 29 Cont...

Page 5: ...gn Procedure 155 Maintenance 173 Troubleshooting 180 Embedded RDS 185 Product Overview 185 Limitations 186 Service cautions 187 E RDS Setup 187 FAQ 190 Troubleshooting 192 Error code and strings 195 Updater 198 Functional Overview 198 Limitations and Cautions 201 Preparation 202 System Management Operations 207 Maintenance 212 FAQ 213 DCM 216 DCM 216 Limitations about Import Export by Settings Reg...

Page 6: ...ol Panel 289 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB 293 Removing the Touch Panel LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 294 Original Exposure System 295 Removing the Reader Scanner Unit 295 Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror 299 Controller System 303 Removing the Controller Cover 303 Removing the HDD 303 Removing the Main Controller PCB 306 Removing the DC Controller PCB 308 Removi...

Page 7: ...e Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller 365 Removing the Right Door Unit 368 Removing the First Delivery Unit 371 Removing the Second Delivery Unit 372 Removing the Third Delivery Unit 374 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 374 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 376 Removing the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Unit Option 377 Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller 379 Removing the Registration Rol...

Page 8: ...22 Flow C Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 423 Flow D Flow for identifying the cause of failure in the Main Controller PCB and Flash PCB 424 Controller Self Diagnosis 425 Introduction 425 Debug Log 431 Function Overview 431 Saving and Collecting Debug Logs 435 Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs 447 Version Upgrade 448 Overview 448 Version Upgrade via SST 450 Version Upgrade usin...

Page 9: ...ADJUST Adjustment mode 718 FUNCTION Operation inspection mode 810 OPTION Specification setting mode 834 TEST Print test mode 947 COUNTER Counter mode 953 FEEDER ADF service mode 979 DISPLAY State display mode 979 ADJUST Adjustment mode 979 FUNCTION Operation inspection mode 980 SORTER Service mode for delivery options 982 ADJUST Adjustment mode 982 FUNCTION Operation inspection mode 991 OPTION Spe...

Page 10: ...ion Outline Drawing 1054 Checking the Contents 1055 Installation Procedure 1055 Checking after Installation 1066 Utility Tray A2 1067 Points to Note when Installing 1067 Checking the Contents 1067 Installation Outline Drawing 1068 Installation Procedure 1068 When Installing the USB Keyboard 1072 Stamp Unit B1 1073 Points to Note at Installation 1073 Installation Outline Drawing 1073 Check Items wh...

Page 11: ...D Options 1135 Combination of HDD Options 1135 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export 1135 Making a Backup of the Data reference only 1137 TYPE 1 HDD Data Encryption Kit Installation Procedure 1141 Points to Note at Installation 1141 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Kit 1141 Checking the Contents 1142 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power 1142 Check Items when Turning OFF the ...

Page 12: ...ing the Security Mark 1186 Informing the System Administrator That Installation Is Complete 1186 Executing auto gradation adjustment 1187 Execution of the minimum installation work 1187 APPENDICES 1188 Service Tools 1189 Special Tools 1189 Solvents and Oils 1189 General Circuit Diagram 1190 Backup Data 1191 Data Location Lists Delete Method Lists 1191 Backup Restore Method Lists 1 2 1194 Backup Re...

Page 13: ...er Safety 2 Handling of Laser System 2 Turn power switch ON 2 Power Supply 3 Toner Safety 3 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery 3 Notes Before it Works Serving 4 Points to Note at Cleaning 4 Notes on Assembly Disassembly 4 ...

Page 14: ...revent the eye from exposure The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt der Augenschäden verursachen kann wenn man in diesen Strahl blickt Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromver...

Page 15: ...o an extension cord It may cause a fire or electrical shock The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic iron and a trace of pigments CAUTION Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion Handling Adhered Toner Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash...

Page 16: ...ng area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling Notes on Assembly Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble disassemble the device 1 Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assemb...

Page 17: ...triangle mark take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value Type of Screws RS tight W Sams Binding TP Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Tightening torque N m M4 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 M3 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 6 Ap...

Page 18: ...Product Overview 1 Product Lineup 7 Features 11 Specifications 17 Parts Name 26 ...

Page 19: ...DV C7200 Series iR ADV C5200 Series iR ADV C2200 Series iR ADV C350 Series New Light ࣥࢼ ࡓ ᵓᡂࡢ ࣛࢫࢺ Host machine Product name imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 C3325 C3320 Underlined 2 digit numeric figures indicate print speed ppm print per minute C3330 C3325 C3320 Print Speed BW Color 30 30 ppm 25 25 ppm 20 20 ppm 1 Product Overview 7 ...

Page 20: ...te AY1 Option cassette for Cassette 2 3 4 large size 12 Copy Tray J2 3 Way Unit D1 is required 13 Inner 2way Tray J1 3 Way Unit D1 is required Cannot be installed with Inner Finisher G1 Cannot be installed with Booklet Finisher U1 Cannot be installed with Staple Finisher U1 14 Inner Finisher G1 Cannot be installed with Inner 2way Tray J1 Cannot be installed with Booklet Finisher U1 Cannot be insta...

Page 21: ...1 Copy Card Reader Attachment B4 is required Cannot be installed with Copy Control Interface Kit A1 Cannot be installed with Serial Interface Kit K2 3 Copy Card Reader Attachment B4 Copy Card Reader F1 is required 4 Power Supply Cable W1 Only for Brazil 5 Super G3 FAX Board AR1 6 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AR1 Super G3 FAX Board AR1 is required 7 Voice Guidance Kit F2 Voice Guidance Connection Ki...

Page 22: ...rface Kit K2 14 Removable HDD Kit AK1 15 Remote Fax Kit A1 PCL International Font Set A1 PCL Printer Kit BB1 PS Printer Kit BB1 Direct Print Kit for PDF H1 Direct Print Kit for XPS H1 Direct Print Kit for PDF XPS H1 Barcode Printing Kit D1 Color Universal Send Kit AA1 Universal Send Trace Smooth PDF Kit A1 Universal Send Advanced Feature Set D1 Universal Send Advanced Feature Set E1 Universal Send...

Page 23: ...erviceability Improved usability Improved usability Improved usability Low running cost Low running cost ADF Pickup Separation Roller Easier replacement Features Toner Container This equipment uses IAP Insulated Air Pressure toner bottles Characteristics Description Toner supply mouth Smaller diameter Toner soiling resistant soiling resistant Toner supply Air assist method Enables stable toner sup...

Page 24: ...ermore the following parts can be replaced by the user User replaceable consumable parts Parts number Model number Description of replacement procedure Waste Toner Container FM1 A606 WT 202 On individual package Fixing Unit FM1 A613 100V FM1 D276 120V FM1 D277 230V FX 202 On individual package ADF Maintenance Kit a set of Pickup Roller Separation Roller 4Y8 3044 DR 202 In the procedure included in...

Page 25: ...l Consumbls Others Check Item Number from the Control Panel UI Labels Item number labels have also been added to the host machine and can be checked Toner Item number Drum Unit Items whose item numbers are displayed Black Toner K Yellow Toner Y Magenta Toner M Cyan Toner C Waste Toner Container Staples Drum Unit 1 The item numbers of the Fixing Unit and ADF Maintenance Kit are not displayed 1 Can ...

Page 26: ...n easy to understand navigation of the replacement so that they can replace parts correctly without performing any wrong operation Item Display timing Toner Container When the toner becomes empty For Bk it is forcibly displayed by pop up For YMC it is displayed when the button at the bottom right is pressed since printing using only BK is still possible Waste Toner Container An orange button appea...

Page 27: ... date and time 6 Network Settings Sets the IP address subnet and gateway 7 DNS Proxy Settings DNS Proxy Settings 8 Selection Counry Retion FAX TYPE settings Skipped depending on the country The countries that require selection are USA EUR and ASIA 9 FAX Settings Sipped if no G3 fax Configuration of a second line is outside the scope of the Setup Guide 10 System Manager Information Settings System ...

Page 28: ...he Developing Unit or drum of any of the Y M C colors has occurred B W printing and copying remain possible without entering the limited printer function mode where the entire printing function stops Applying Setting Changes without Restart Changes in the main network related setting values can be applied without restart after changing the settings There are some setting values that require restar...

Page 29: ...meth od Cleaning Blade Transfer cleaning method Cleaning Blade Toner type Non magnetic negative toner Toner supplying meth od Toner Container method Toner level detection function Yes Leading edge image margin 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm Left right edge im age margin 2 5 1 5 mm 2 side 2 5 2 0 mm Leading edge non im age width 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm Left right edge non image width 2 5 1 5 mm 2 side 2 5 2 0 mm Warm up ti...

Page 30: ...LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC OFFICIO E OFFICIO B OFFICIO M OFFICIO A OFFICIO FOLIO A LTR A LTRR GLTR GLTR R GLGL ILGL AFLS FLS Custom size 98 4 x 139 7 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm and Envelopes Pickup capacity Cassette 550 sheets 80 g m2 or 640 sheets 64 g m2 Multi purpose Tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 Duplex method Through pass duplex Memory capacity 2 GB HDD capacity 250 GB or more Used space 215 GB Operation noi...

Page 31: ...machine temperature or image quality may cause machine operations to pause or become slow Paper type Following shows the types of usable papers See the table below for the custom paper size Type Feeding direction mm Width direction mm Custom paper size 0 2 139 7 to 147 9 98 4 to 119 9 Custom paper size 0 3 148 to 215 9 Custom paper size 0 4 216 to 457 2 Custom paper size 1 1 139 7 to 147 9 120 to ...

Page 32: ... No Yes Yes Yes B5 182 257 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 148 210 Yes No No No No A5R 210 148 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 26...

Page 33: ... 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Y...

Page 34: ... to 320 Yes No No No No Long Length 457 3 to 1200 98 4 to 320 Yes No No No No Custom paper size 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 8 1 9 Yes No No No No 1 Side Coated Paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 1 Side Coated Paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 1 Side Coated Paper 3 164 to 220 g m2 Duplex Coated Paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 Duplex Coated Paper 2 129 ...

Page 35: ...o No LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No No No No STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes No No No No STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No No No No EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes No No No No K8 390 270 Yes No No No No K16 195 270 Yes No No No No Free Size 139 7 to 630 98 4 to 320 Yes No No No No Custom paper size 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 6 1...

Page 36: ... 297 210 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4 210 297 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5R 257 182 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B5 182 257 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 148 210 Yes No No No No A5R 210 148 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 ...

Page 37: ...aper size 3 2 3 3 5 3 5 4 5 6 6 2 6 3 7 4 7 5 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Envelope 75 to 105 g m2 COM10_R 241 3 104 7 Yes No Yes No No Monarch_R 190 5 98 4 Yes No Yes No No ISO C5_R 229 162 Yes No No No No DL_R 220 110 Yes No Yes No No Nagagata 3_R 235 120 Yes No Yes No No Younagagata 3_R 235 120 Yes No Yes No No Kakugata 2_R 332 240 Yes No Yes No No COM10 104 7 241 3 Yes Yes No No No Monarch 98 4 190 5 Ye...

Page 38: ...Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Control Panel Touch Panel Display Numeric key Brightness Adjustment Dial Energy Saver key Volume Settings key Counter Check key Stop key Start key Settings Registration key Clear key Processing Data Indicator Error Indicator Main Power Indicator ID Log In Out key Edit Pen Main Menu Quick Menu Status Monitor Cancel Reset key Destination Forward Settings 1 Product Overview 26 ...

Page 39: ...onfiguration 28 Document Exposure 29 Main Controller 38 Laser Exposure System 53 Image Formation System 62 Fixing System 97 Pickup Feed System 111 External Auxiliary System 134 MEAP 143 Embedded RDS 185 Updater 198 DCM 216 ...

Page 40: ...ixing System and Pickup Feed System Pickup Laser Scanner Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB Cassette Pickup Feed System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System ITB Reader ADF Transfer Fixing Delivery Deplexing Feed Drum Drum Drum Drum Original Exposure and Feed System Controller System Multi purpose Tray Pickup Laser Beam Paper Flow Signal Flow 2 Technology 28 ...

Page 41: ... 50 Color digital reproduction In horizontal direction Image processing in main controller PCB In vertical direction Image processing in main controller PCB Scan magnification change is al so used for 300dpi SEND job Number of line of Reading sensor 4 lines R G B B W Original size detection In BOOK mode Horizontal direction detection by Scanner unit sensor scanner unit Vertical scanning Detection ...

Page 42: ...er Left 4 Reader PCB Cover 5 Reader Glass Support Cover 6 Reader Rear Cover 7 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Right 8 Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box 9 Reader Front Cover Small 10 Reader Right Retaining Cover 11 Reader Front Cover Cross Section 1 2 3 No Name 1 Stream Read Glass 2 Copy Board Glass 3 Scanner Unit 2 Technology 30 ...

Page 43: ...egree Original size sensor AB type AK type PS_R1 Size detection in vertical direction AB type AK type Original size sensor INCH type PS_R2 Size detection in vertical direction INCH type Scanner unit Image reading analog image processing Reader Heater HTR01 To prevent condensation from forming on the reader Scanner Unit Original exposure and scanning are performed by the integrated scanner unit of ...

Page 44: ...te Reading sensor The Reading Sensor scans the image per 1 image line The Reading Sensor has 4 lines R G B B W but only uses 3 lines R G B when scanning images Related Error Codes E302 0001 White Shading error E302 0002 Black Shading error Related Alarm Codes 02 0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit LED light intensity alarm Reader Heater See External Auxiliary Heater Control in Chapter 2 Controls Readin...

Page 45: ... Correction Shading correction corrects unevenness of the output of the Reading Sensor In shading correction there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job Operating timing When a job starts Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original With this operation light of LED Lamp is emitted to the Standard White Plate and the reflected light is converted into digital data...

Page 46: ...rrection control is always executed at the time of white shading during shading correction There are 2 processings for dust Processing to avoid dust when starting the first stream reading job after turning ON the power when ending a stream reading job etc Like the time of completion of a job presence absence of dust is detected at all positions 1 2 3 4 and 5 in that order The position where dust i...

Page 47: ...orrection Processing in Vertical Scanning Direction Color displacement correction control in the vertical scanning direction is used to correct displacement of R G and B by shifting the pixels in the vertical scanning direction by less than 1 pixel to align the red and blue images with green when the scanned R G and B images are not accurately overlapped at color scanning Example A scanned image o...

Page 48: ...easured while the LED is OFF 2 Detection of output level of each sensor The LED of the Reading Sensor Unit is turned ON to measure the sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal scanning direction Furthermore the Reflection Photo Sensor LED for the vertical scanning direction is turned ON to measure the sensor output The original size is determined by the combination of these output...

Page 49: ...rences and moire caused by the differences in the MTF of the Reading Unit are reduced COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF CLC Adjustment of image position at copyboard reading By setting the following service modes the image position at copyboard scanning is adjusted COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X vertical scanning COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y horizontal scanning Vertical Scanning Magnification Ratio Adjustment By se...

Page 50: ...Connection I F RAM Temporarily storage of image data Capacity of 1 GB for controller control 1 GB for image processing USB port USB2 0 Device I F USB2 0 Host I F SRAM none Hard disk 2 5 inch SATA I F Standard 250 GB 215 GB usable area address list security information password certificate image data preferences Flash PCB Storage of system software 2 GB TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encrypt...

Page 51: ...ications J3 USB I F Device J20 J25 Low voltage Power Supply PCB J4 Control Panel I F J23 J29 Hard disk J5 USB I F Host J24 Counter Memory PCB J6 USB Device Port J27 J30 Fax 1 Line J7 LAN I F J28 Image Data Analyzer PCB J8 TPM PCB J32 Main Power Supply Switch J10 Flash PCB J33 Scanner Unit J14 Serial Interface Kit J35 J38 ADF Driver PCB Copy Card Reader J36 Scanner Motor J15 Copy Control Interface ...

Page 52: ...hutdown Sequence Before shutting down the power supply it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process Purpose to prevent damage on the HDD and execute the fixing disengagement operation This sequential process is called shutdown sequence With this machine the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch and the shutdown sequence is started and executed automatically ...

Page 53: ...Controller Print Main Controller PCB LAN Controller Interpreter HDD Writing Reading To DC Controller Network Image Data Buffer Memory Rendering HDD Print the Image Processing Extension Processing SEND Data Conversion JPEG Encode Main Controller PCB LAN Controller HDD Writing Reading Network Image Data Buffer Memory HDD Image Processing Resolution Conversion Image rotation JPEG Conversion Extension...

Page 54: ...DC Controller Image Data Buffer Memory Image Processing Color Space Conversion Resolution Conversion JBIG Conversion Main Controller PCB Security Management Settings of Hard Disk Besides data of originals that is accumulated using the fax function this machine s hard disk stores information registered in the address book and password information of the address book Therefore management of the data...

Page 55: ... files in the reception tray Confidential Fax Inbox Memory RX Inbox are deleted Data sent received to from Fax I Fax Spool data Data temporarily saved as print data Initialize All Data Settings Saved files and registered information are initialized Data saved in the machine such as files information registered in the address book job log information and so on can be deleted initialized CAUTION Ini...

Page 56: ...ackup Key for TPM failure Public Key Common Key Password Flash PCB USB flash drive Password When TPM settings are enabled the TPM key becomes valid so three stage keys can be used Therefore the security information of each machine is securely protected The security information for this setting consists of three keys and the information of multiple passwords stored in the Flash PCB Each piece of in...

Page 57: ...of the following points After setting it to On immediately back up the TPM key Be sure to remember the password set when the TPM key was backed up Do not lose the USB flash drive containing the backup file of the TPM key When replacing the TPM PCB due to a failure etc the TPM key needs to be restored after replacement Restore TPM Key is enabled only when replacing the TPM PCB If the TPM key is not...

Page 58: ...ine The USB I F host is located on the Control Panel side and the Main Controller PCB side CAUTION Connect only one USB flash drive If two or more are connected when the backup operation is executed a message is displayed indicating that the backup has failed NOTE As the backup file of the TPM key is saved by serial number backup files of multiple machines can be saved in the USB flash drive 2 Exe...

Page 59: ...3 After clicking Password enter the password 4 to 12 digits Then re enter the verification password 4 Click OK Backup of TPM key starts 2 Technology 47 ...

Page 60: ...e the backup files of the TPM keys in a USB flash drive at a location to which the general public has access such as on a server NOTE Name of the backup file of the TPM key The serial number of the machine is automatically assigned to the name of the backup file Restoration of TPM key The operation is almost the same as that of backup Differences When the restoration is completed restart turning O...

Page 61: ...s time be sure to back up the data before configuring the TPM Setting to Off 1 Before deleting the data back up or export necessary data List of Data that is Deleted Data saved in Mail Box Data saved in the reception tray Confidential Fax Inbox Memory RX Inbox Destination information registered in the address book The reading mode registered by the send function Favorite Settings registered by the...

Page 62: ...word of proxy authentication client FLASH Log in password of NetWare print server FLASH Shared key of IPSec policy FLASH User name and password for PEAP TTLS authentication FLASH Others User information registered in the device Hard disk Fax RX password FLASH Department management data including administrator password FLASH Encryption key MIB Authentication key and encryption key for SNMPv3 FLASH ...

Page 63: ...side and that on the Encryption Board do not match E602 2000 occurs There are four cases of combination among the device the Encryption Board and the hard disk The state of each combination is described here Case 1 Normal operation Case 2 A hard disk related error occurs because the system on the hard disk cannot be read errors other than E602 2000 Case 3 E602 2000 occurs because of the failure of...

Page 64: ...he authentication information is not cleared by the clearing of MN CON there is no work to be done specific to the HDD En cryption Kit Related Error Code E602 2000 Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board E602 5001 Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board E602 5002 HDD error 2 Technology 52 ...

Page 65: ... by the signal from the DC Controller This machine adopts the 1 polygon 4 laser method to realize a compact size UN04 DC Controller PCB UN05 Main Controller PCB UN09 UN08 M01 2 3 4 5 7 1 8 6 No Name 1 Polygon Mirror 2 Photosensitive Drum 3 APC signal 4 Video signal 5 BD signal 6 Scanner Motor control signal 7 ITOP 8 Laser On Off signal UN08 C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Y M Laser Driver PCB M01 Scann...

Page 66: ...Number of laser beams 1 beam per color scanning Resolution At full speed 600 dpi At half speed 600 or 1200 dpi Motor type Brushless motor Motor revolutions Approx 42 300 rpm full half speed Number of Polygon Mirror surfaces Four surfaces 20 mm dia 1 Polygon 4 Laser Method This method performs laser scanning using one Scanner Motor and four laser diodes The multifaceted mirror on one Scanner Motor ...

Page 67: ...zontal scanning synchronous control Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direc tion Horizontal scanning syn chronous control on page 57 Vertical scanning synchronous control Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction Vertical Scanning Synchro nization Control on page 57 Image mask control Prevents soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Image Ma...

Page 68: ... C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Laser ON OFF control Purpose Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals Execution timing After Power On Control description The DC Controller switches between four modes Forced OFF mode APC mode Print mode and Standby mode by laser control signals DC Controller PCB UN04 CPU Main Controller PCB UN05 Video signal ASIC Laser ON OF...

Page 69: ...al and sends video signals Y_VDO M_VDO C_VDO and Bk_VDO to the Y M and C Bk Laser Driver PCBs while regarding the reference BD signal as the vertical scanning synchronous signal BD for each line This enables each Laser Driver PCB to emit a laser beam from a fixed position for each line NOTE As the BD signal is the horizontal scanning synchronous signal of the Bk color the Bk color serves as each c...

Page 70: ...UN05 DC Controller PCB UN04 ASIC CPU LAser ON OFF signal ITOP Video signal C BkLaser Driver PCB UN09 APC signal ASIC Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 Laser Laser Laser Image Mask Control Purpose Prevents soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller The image mask control is executed in both the horizontal and vertical scanning directions to control the laser beam not to be emitted in non image area Exe...

Page 71: ...s the BD signal and inputs it to the Y M Laser Driver PCB 4 The Y M Laser Driver PCB controls the Scanner Motor control signals acceleration signal ACC deceleration signal DEC based on the input timing of the BD signal to control the Scanner Motor rotation speed Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser BD ACC DEC FG BD Sensor Scanner Monitor C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Y Mk Laser Driver PCB UN08 ASIC Relat...

Page 72: ...Polygon Mirror surface Execution timing At power on and at each print Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB measures the BD interval after the completion of constant speed rotation control of the Scanner Motor 2 The Main Controller PCB calculates the correction value from the displacement of the BD interval 3 The write start position is corrected by correcting the write start timing based ...

Page 73: ... E110 0001 Scanner Motor error E110 0002 Scanner Motor error E110 0003 Scanner Motor error E110 0004 Scanner Motor error 2 Technology 61 ...

Page 74: ...harging method Roller charging Cleaning Sponge Roller Toner Container Toner Container detection Yes Replacement of Toner Container during continuous print Disabled Transfer method Intermediate transfer ITB ITB Unit Circumferential length Inner circumferential length 791 9 mm Cleaning Cleaning Blade Belt displacement correction Controlled by rib Primary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller Dise...

Page 75: ...neg atively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the Photosensitive Drum 4 Transfer block Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB by applying positive charge from the back side of the ITB 5 Secondary transfer Toner on the ITB is transferred to the paper by applying positive potential to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 6 Separation...

Page 76: ...Supply Area Toner Supply Area on page 83 Parts Drive Configuration Parts Drive Configuration on page 83 Opening Closing of Toner Container Shutter Opening Closing of Toner Container Shutter on page 84 Bottle State Detection Bottle State Detection on page 84 Toner Container Detection Toner Container Detection on page 85 ATR Auto Toner Replenishment Control ATR Auto Toner Replenishment Control on pa...

Page 77: ...Controls Other Controls on page 94 Special Controls Special Controls on page 94 Warm up Rotation Control Warm up Rotation Control on page 95 Behavior When Color Printing is Limited or There is No Color Toner Behavior when color printing is limited or there is no color toner on page 96 Drum Unit Developing Unit Parts Drive Configuration CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 M M02 M0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No Parts name Role ...

Page 78: ... Cleaning Screw Residual toner that has been removed by the Cleaning Blade is fed 3 Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed 4 Primary Charging Roller The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform potential 5 Drum Cleaning Pre Exposure LED Residual charge remaining on the Photosensitive Drum surface is removed 6 Residual charge Residual charge remai...

Page 79: ... speed COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPC2 Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre exposure LED Bk light intensity 1 2 speed COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPK2 Related Alarm Codes 29 0101 Drum Y pre exposure alarm 29 0201 Drum M pre exposure alarm 29 0301 Drum C pre exposure alarm 29 0401 Drum K pre exposure alarm Drum Unit Detection Purpose Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected Detection timing At ...

Page 80: ... of less than 8 hours No drum jam is detected when a print job is executed with no Drum Unit installed in the machine Related jam code 00 0B0D No drum jam Drum Unit Life Detection Purpose To detect the life of the Drum Unit Photosensitive Drum Detection timing At power on For each print At recovery from sleep mode Detection description 1 The drum life is calculated from the drum rotation time appl...

Page 81: ...er pre toner low alarm is sent Default Hide 3 When the Drum Unit is detected Detected to location Drum Unit New Old Sensor Drum Unit New Old Sensor Message Operation of the host machine None Replace the drum unit 1 2 3 4 None Alarm code 40 0070 Y 40 0071 M 40 0072 C 40 0073 Bk 4 None 35 0070 Y 35 0071 M 35 0072 C 35 0073 Bk 5 1 Lv 1 COPIER COUNTER LF Y M C K DRM LF 2 Lv 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DL...

Page 82: ...gative which has been generated by the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Primary Charging Roller The primary charging bias value is determined by the DC Controller PCB UN04 based on the following conditions Environment humidity detected by the Environment Sensor UN27 Life of the Photosensitive Drum UN04 UN03 DC Controller PCB Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB 1 2 No Part...

Page 83: ...age quality UN04 UN03 DC Controller PCB Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB 1 No Parts name 1 Developing Cylinder Transfer Separation Parts Drive Configuration M02 4 5 3 2 1 No Parts name Role 1 Primary Transfer Roller Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is attracted to the ITB 2 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner inside the ITB Cleaning Unit is fed 3 ITB Intermediate Transfer Belt Toner on the Photos...

Page 84: ...e elapsed in sleep mode Automatic adjust ment by switching modes When switching to a col or job from a B W job 100 or more accumulated images of color jobs When sudden environmental changes are detected by the Environment Sensor from when the previous ATVC was executed Automatic adjust ment by replace ment When replacing the Drum Unit When a new Drum Unit is inserted Replace the Developing Unit Wh...

Page 85: ...as been generated on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller The secondary transfer bias value is determined by the DC Controller through ATVC control which maintains a constant current value running though the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Related service mode Display of the environment during secondary transfer ATVC control COPIER DISPLAY ...

Page 86: ...transitions to Bk mode of the HP state Related error code E074 0001 ITB HP time out error E074 0002 ITB HP time out error Status of each mode timing to enter each mode Mode Status Operation status Bk mode Only the Bk Primary Transfer Roller is engaged Detected by the Primary Transfer Disengagement HP Sensor PS33 At standby During deep sleep At B W printing 1 M08 M08 CL mode All Primary Transfer Ro...

Page 87: ...sm 2 3 4 5 1 No Parts name Role 1 ITB Tension Roller It drives the ITB 2 Reinforcing tape It is used to reinforce the ITB edges to increase the strength 3 Rib It controls displacement of the ITB 4 ITB Belt for performing primary transfer 5 Flange The shape is sloped to prevent the rib from being placed over it ITB Cleaning Purpose To remove residual toner on the ITB to prevent it from affecting th...

Page 88: ...d on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 2 through the Separation Static Eliminator 1 Residual toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attached to the ITB and then collected by the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 1 Control timing Adjustment timing Condition Automatic adjustment by the output of a specific number of prints When a job starts Eac...

Page 89: ...EANING 2TR CLN is executed Related service mode Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING 2TR CLN Separation Purpose This control separates paper from the ITB by elastic force of the paper Curvature separation method Description of Control in case of thin paper Since the elastic force of thin paper is weak paper cannot be separated only by the elastic force of the pa...

Page 90: ...nment Yes High temperature and high humidity environ ment Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 hours or more have elapsed in high speed startup mode Yes At initial installation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes At recovery from sleep mode 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode Yes Yes 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode high temperature and high humidity environ ment Yes Yes Yes Yes When a job starts At initial rotatio...

Page 91: ...the target color on the ITB 2 The DC Controller measures the patch density using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear Front UN25 26 and corrects the laser output for each color to get the target density D half Control Purpose Top determine the optimal image gradation Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB outputs patch data in each color Y M C Bk to the DC Controller PCB 2 The DC Control...

Page 92: ... displacement by the patch sensor 1 A patch pattern short long for each color is created on the ITB 2 This patch pattern is read by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear Front UN25 26 to detect the amount of color displacement compared to the reference color Y 3 Based on the abovementioned detection result correction is performed according to the amount of color displacement Long patch pattern 8...

Page 93: ...sition in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment 34 0046 The correction value Bk of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment 34 2201 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning direction was not found M 34 2211 As a re...

Page 94: ...t side base intnsty Swave COPIER DISPLAY DENS P B S C Auto Gradation Adjustment PASCAL Control Purpose Gradation density characteristics on the image are stabilized This control is executed when Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust is selected in the Settings Registration menu Gradation density of the patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create an image density correction table...

Page 95: ... to 42 New Old Bottle Detection Sensor Y M C Bk The state of the Toner Container is detected PS26 to 29 Toner Supply Sensor Y M C Bk Presence absence of the Toner Container is detected Rotation of the Toner Container is detected UN21 to 24 Toner Density Sensor Y M C Bk Toner carrier ratio in the Developing Unit is detected M04 M05 Bottle Motor YM CK Toner Bottle is rotated M10 Developing Motor The...

Page 96: ...Shutter Bottle State Detection Purpose Check whether there is a problem with the inserted Toner Container Detection timing At power on When the Front Cover is closed When recovering from sleep mode not displayed after Use is pressed The Bottle New Old Sensor Y M C Bk UN39 UN40 UN41 UN42 detects the state from the memory 1 of the Toner Container UN39 40 41 42 1 2 Technology 84 ...

Page 97: ...olor is set The correct Toner Container is set Related Alarm Codes Toner memory detection alarm Y 10 0091 Toner memory detection alarm M 10 0092 Toner memory detection alarm C 10 0093 Toner memory detection alarm Bk 10 0094 Toner Container Detection Purpose Presence absence of the Toner Container is detected Control description The Toner Supply Sensor Y M C Bk PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 is arranged as sh...

Page 98: ...in Controller The DC Controller PCB turns ON the Bottle Motors YM CK M04 M05 when it determines that toner supply is necessary This supplies the specified amount of toner to the Developing Unit M10 M04 M05 PS26 27 28 29 UN39 40 41 42 UN21 22 23 24 UN04 UN05 1 Video Count Value Developing Assembly supply count ATR Sensor result Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB Hopper Unit Developing Motor Tone...

Page 99: ... control toner is supplied This machine has 2 Toner Bottle Motors and toner is supplied by driving Toner Bottles of two colors alternately by one motor Expansion Contraction Small toner supply mouth M10 M04 M05 PS26 27 28 29 UN04 UN05 Main Controller PCB UN21 22 23 24 Video Count Value Developing Assembly supply count ATR Sensor result Shrunk Press DC Controller PCB Bottle Motor YM Bottle Motor CK...

Page 100: ... The driving force is transmitted only to the gears on the side toward which the gear moved and the Toner Bottle rotates and toner is supplied Y M M04 M05 REAR VIEW 5 When toner is supplied the Toner Supply Sensor Y M C Bk PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 is started while it is turned ON Driving the Bottle Motor YM CK M04 M05 rotates the Toner Bottle causing the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor 2 Technology 88 ...

Page 101: ...220 Bottle Motor error M E025 0310 Bottle Motor error C E025 0320 Bottle Motor error C E025 0410 Bottle Motor error Bk E025 0420 Bottle Motor error Bk E025 0168 No toner detection error Y E025 0268 No toner detection error M E025 0368 No toner detection error C E025 0468 No toner detection error Bk Toner Level Detection Prior delivery alarm Display Remaining Toner error 7 Empty toner Toner level D...

Page 102: ...ed and the machine stops 6 Alarm code created by UGW it is not recorded in the LUI log 7 Whether to display the message to warn of the remaining toner level can be set in COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW TNR WARN Lv 1 Service Mode Setting of the Bk color Toner Container prior delivery alarm notification timing COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK Setting of the Y M C color Toner Container prior delivery alarm noti...

Page 103: ...Cover of the host machine 2 Default setting ON Display 3 OFF Not display 4 Alarm code 5 10 0100 007x Number of installations of new Toner Containers each color 10 0100 008x Not used 10 0100 018x Number of installations of unidentified Toner Bottles each color 1 The alert tone generated when a message is displayed can be switched ON or OFF in the menu shown below Volume Control Audible Tones Non Em...

Page 104: ...ner Feed Unit is comprised of the following parts drive operations Waste toner in the Drum Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit is fed to the Waste Toner Container M03 M02 M17 1 2 3 UN30 SW01 4 No Parts name Role 1 ITB Cleaning Screw Collected toner is fed to the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 Drum Unit Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the Drum Unit is fed 3 Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner collected from the ITB Unit Dru...

Page 105: ...oner container Host machine is stopped Alarm Codes 11 0010 11 0001 1 The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set to be displayed or hidden using COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW WT WARN 2 The timing to display the preparation warning can be changed using COPIER OPTION CUSTOM EXT TBOX the timing to notify that the Waste Toner Container is full is also changed at the same time 3 The numbe...

Page 106: ...l For each 100 accumulated images When transparency is fed At job completion For each 70 accumulated images If continuous printing is performed without toner being fed to the ITB Cleaning Blade the Cleaning Blade may flip Because of this toner solid Bk with the width of 297 mm and the length of 1 mm is transferred to the ITB and is supplied to the ITB Cleaning Blade Developing discharge sequence C...

Page 107: ...r at power on or recovery from sleep mode Control description According to the conditions one of the following 3 patterns of warm up rotation is performed none short or long Condition Pattern Power on Short When the power is turned ON at quick startup High temperature and high humid ity environment None Not a high temperature and high hu midity environment None When recovering from sleep mode 8 ho...

Page 108: ... Shading Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Unit Related error code E012 0001 CL Drum Motor error E012 0002 CL Drum Motor error E012 0003 CL Drum Motor error E020 01A8 Toner Density Sensor Y output error E020 02A8 Toner Density Sensor M output error E020 03A8 Toner ...

Page 109: ...nit is new Whether the Fixing Unit is new can be detected Specifications Item Function Method Fixing method On demand fixing Fixing speed 119 4 mm s 1 1 speed 59 7 mm s 1 2 speed Heater Ceramic Heater The Main Heater heat distribution high at center and the Sub Heater heat distribution high at edges are individually driven The heater activation rate changes according to the paper size Purpose To c...

Page 110: ...engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the rear side of the host machine Temperature is controlled and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase are detected TH01_03 Sub Thermistor 1 This is engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the front side of the host machine Temperature is controlled and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase are...

Page 111: ...target level and keep it during printing Startup initial rotation temperature control Initial rotation extension temperature control only for media of 300 mm in width or wider Print temperature control Paper interval temperature control Down Sequence Control This control is executed to prevent a fixing failure due to temperature increase at the edge or temperature decrease When this control is exe...

Page 112: ...rature STBY INTR PRNT Time Sheet to sheet control temperature Startup warm up rotation control temperature Startup initial rotation Temperature Control A fixing temperature is increased to a printable temperature after receiving a command to start printing Temperature Control by Extended Initial Rotation The control to extend the initial rotation time is executed for media wider than 300 mm becaus...

Page 113: ...Coated 2 129 to 163 175 to 196 1 Sided Coated 3 164 to 220 181 to 202 2 Sided Coated 1 106 to 128 171 to 192 2 Sided Coated 2 129 to 163 175 to 196 2 Sided Coated 3 164 to 220 181 to 202 Transparency 121 to 220 161 to 191 Label paper 118 to 185 181 to 202 Postcard 164 to 220 181 to 202 Envelope 75 to 105 175 to 196 Target temperature during printing when paper width exceeds 300 mm Paper type Paper...

Page 114: ...r detected by the Main Thermistor COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG FIX E To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG FIX E2 To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 2 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG FIX E3 Setting of fixing temperature control temperature Plain paper 1 Color paper COPIER OPTION CUSTOM ...

Page 115: ...rature increase at a non paper feed area at continuous printing of small size paper paper with the width direction length of LTR landscape or less Execution Condition When the detection temperature by the Sub Thermistor 1 TH01_03 or Sub Thermistor 2 TH01_01 exceeded a specified temperature 255 to 270 deg C during printing Operation The paper interval is increased to lower the temperature and adjus...

Page 116: ...Sided Coated 2 129 to 163 175 to 196 2 Sided Coated 3 164 to 220 181 to 202 Transparency 121 to 220 161 to 191 Label paper 118 to 185 181 to 202 Postcard 164 to 220 181 to 202 Envelope 75 to 105 175 to 196 Printing speed when paper width exceeds 300 mm Paper type Paper weight g m2 Paper Width mm Resolution dpi Fixing speed mm s Target temperature deg C Print speed ppm Color B W Thin paper 52 to 63...

Page 117: ... temperature of the Main Thermistor TH01_02 is the specified temperature or higher at the time a sheet with a width wider than the preceding one is fed during printing Operation The paper interval is increased to decrease temperature and feeding the succeeding sheet and power supply to the Heater are stopped Termination condition This down sequence is terminated at the point when any of the follow...

Page 118: ...ntering sleep mode At occurrence of a jam When an error occurs excluding E009 E014 of fixing drive system errors When no fixing operation has occurred for 4 hours or more while the Fixing Film Unit is engaged Related Error Code E009 0000 Fixing pressure timeout error E009 0001 Fixing disengagement timeout error Fixing Arch Control Purpose To prevent image failure feed failure Operation The slack t...

Page 119: ... A4 LRT plain paper relative to the process speed When Arch Sensor PS11 is OFF After the Arch Sensor has been detected OFF for consecutive 20 ms or longer the Fixing Motor drive is decelerated by 3 9 for A4 LTR plain paper relative to the process speed 3 The Fixing Motor drive speed is switched as the Arch Sensor PS11 repeatedly turns ON and OFF 4 When the paper trailing edge passes 20 mm in front...

Page 120: ...nt message Lv 2 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film Lv 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW FXWRNLVL The life of the Fixing Unit is detected when FXMSG SW and FXWRNLVL is 1 As the default value of FXWRNLVL is 0 the life is not detected at factory default Detection of whether the Fixing Unit is new The Fixing Fuse PCB UN31 detects whether the Fixing Unit ...

Page 121: ...error Necessary E003 Detection of low temperature 0004 Main Thermistor low temperature detection error Necessary 0005 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 low temperature detection error Necessary 0006 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 low temperature detection error Necessary E004 Detection of a failure in fixing heater drive circuit 0001 Fixing Relay welding detection error Not necessary 0002 Fixing current detection ...

Page 122: ... as 0CF1 JAM Displayed as E002 error E003 Displayed as E003 error In either case the error does not need to be cleared in service mode as replacing the Fixing Unit with a new one blows the fuse of the Fixing Fuse PCB and at the same time clears the error 2 Technology 110 ...

Page 123: ...ata 3 Yougatanaga 3 COM10 No 10 ISO C5 DL Custom size 139 7 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 215 9 mm Cassette 2 A3R B4R A4 B5 11 17R LGL LTR EXE A4R B5R LTRR A5R K8R K16 K16R STMTR 12 18R Envelope Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Kakugata 2 Monarch COM10 No 10 DL Custom size 139 7 mm x 182 mm to 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm Multi purpose Tray A3R B4R A4 B5 A5 11 17R LGLR LTR A4R B5R LTRR EXE A5R STMT STMTR 12x18R A3R K8R ...

Page 124: ...er 1 15 Cassette 1 Separation Roller 5 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 16 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Roller 6 Fixing Pressure Roller 17 Cassette 2 Feed Roller 7 Duplex Roller 2 18 Cassette 2 Separation Roller 8 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 19 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller 9 Registration Roller 20 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 10 Duplex Merging Roller 21 First Delivery Roller 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Rol...

Page 125: ...Sensor PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor PS10 Fixing Outlet Sensor PS51 Second delivery Reverse sensor PS12 Reverse Sensor PS52 Third Delivery Sensor PS14 First Delivery Sensor PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS22 Pre Registration Sensor PS51 and PS52 do not exist on models without 3 Way Unit 2 Technology 113 ...

Page 126: ...30 M09 M31 No Name No Name M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M09 Fixing Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M11 Duplex Reverse Motor M30 Reverce Motor M12 Registration Motor M31 Second Delivery Motor SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid 2 Technology 114 ...

Page 127: ... SL06 M11 No Name No Name M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid M09 Fixing Motor M11 Duplex Reverse Motor M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor 2 Technology 115 ...

Page 128: ...h When the 3 Way Unit D1 is connected Acceleration section Reverse Mouth Reverse Mouth Second Delivery First Delivery Third Delivery Multi purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup 2 Technology 116 ...

Page 129: ...When the 3 Way Unit D1 is not connected Reverse Mouth First Delivery Multi purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup Acceleration section 2 Technology 117 ...

Page 130: ...ction on page 123 Multi purpose Tray Pickup As sembly Multi purpose Tray Pickup Assem bly on page 126 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Control on page 126 Multi purpose Tray paper detection on page 127 Multi purpose Tray Automatic Size Detection on page 127 Fixing Registration Assembly Fixing Registration Assembly on page 128 Registration Control on page 128 Reverse Delivery Assembly Reverse Delivery Ass...

Page 131: ...al Path Roller M06 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A SW16 Cassette 2 Size Switch B PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS06 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Senso...

Page 132: ...fter Sensors are not turned ON for 5 seconds or more no paper is displayed for the corresponding paper source and an alarm code is issued Related Alarm Code 04 0001 Cassette 1 Lifter Error 04 0002 Cassette 2 Lifter Error 04 0003 Cassette 3 Lifter Error 04 0004 Cassette 4 Lifter Error Cassette Pickup Control Rotation of the Cassette Pickup Motor M07 feeds paper to the Vertical Path Roller The Casse...

Page 133: ...ings is performed due to non standard size Custom size 1 Preferences Paper Settings Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer List of Paper Size by Location Location Default setting US Inch size CN A K Size Locations other than above A B size 2 Preferences Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection 3 Configure the setting that supports EXEC 16K Cassette 1 to 4 in the following service mode Lv ...

Page 134: ...dth are detected in accordance with the combination of ON OFF When the cassette presence paper size is changed the DC Controller notifies the Main Controller of the status change In addition the distinction between A5 R and STMT R is determined by the user or service technician while that between EXEC and K16 is determined by the service technician Presence of the cassette is detected when the siz...

Page 135: ...r size setting for the Cassette X A5R STMTR X Cassette numbers 1 to 4 COPIER OPTION CST CSTX P1 Setting that supports EXEC 16K Cassette 1 Service mode Lv 2 COPIER OPTION CST CST K SW Setting that supports EXEC 16K Cassette X X indicates the cassette number 2 to 4 Service mode Lv 2 Cassette 4 COPIER OPTION CST C4 K SW Cassette Heater External Auxiliary Refer to Heater Control on page 137 Paper leve...

Page 136: ... B Paper Sensor Cassette Lifter Sensor 100 to 50 OFF OFF ON ON 50 to 10 OFF ON ON ON 10 to 0 ON OFF ON ON 0 OFF ON PS18 PS04 PS17 1 1 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PS05 ON ON ON ON PS05 ON PS05 OFF OFF ON ON PS05 No Name 1 Paper PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B 2 Technology 124 ...

Page 137: ... Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B Cassette 2 PS06 PS07 2 PS20 PS19 3 1 No Name 1 Lifter Gear 2 Paper Detection Lever 3 Middle Plate PS06 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A 2 Technology 125 ...

Page 138: ...se Tray Pickup Control Paper is picked up from the Multi purpose Tray by the reverse rotation of the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor error When an error in the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 or the Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor PS32 is detected no paper is displayed for the Multi purpose Tray pickup and an alarm code is issued Multi pu...

Page 139: ...onding size LTRR A4R No corresponding size LTRR A4R No corresponding size STMT A5 No corresponding size STMT A5 No corresponding size STMTR A5R No corresponding size STMTR A5R No corresponding size SRA3 No corresponding size No corresponding size No corresponding size 12 x 18 A3 No corresponding size No corresponding size A3 No corresponding size EXEC B5 No corresponding size EXEC K16 No correspon...

Page 140: ...x Merging Roller 3 Pre Registration Sensor Flag PS22 Pre Registration Sensor M12 Registration Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor Registration Control Purpose This control corrects paper skew and aligns the leading edge of the paper with that of the image Skew Correction Control The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller thereby generating an arch in order to correct the skew Then...

Page 141: ...ping the feed or stop registration control that temporarily stops paper feed is applied as appropriate Non stop Registration Control Control to align the leading edge of the paper with the leading edge of the image by accelerating or decelerating the feed speed Paper is not stopped temporarily at the registration position which makes it possible to shorten the paper interval between sheets and imp...

Page 142: ...erse Motor 3 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M30 Reverse Motor 4 First Delivery Roller M31 Second Delivery Motor 5 Third Delivery Roller SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid 6 Duplex Roller 2 7 Duplex Roller 1 When the 3 Way Unit D1 is not connected M11 M09 SL06 3 4 2 No Name No Name 2 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M09 Fixing Motor 3 First Delivery Roller M11 Duplex Reverse Motor 4 Duplex Roller 1 SL06 Du...

Page 143: ...ition S1 Reverse position and standby position 1 and 2 sided Standby position and stop position Standby position Reverse stop position Symbol At 1 sided feeding At 2 sided feeding Symbol At 1 sided feeding At 2 sided feeding S1 Yes R1 Yes S2 Yes R2 Yes S3 Yes Yes S4 Yes When the 3 Way Unit D1 is not installed When the 3 Way Unit is not installed the short path is the only feed route Standard size ...

Page 144: ...ath R1 S1 S2 S3 Third deliv ery Longer than 11 x 17 to 12 x 18 or smaller 432 1 to 457 2 mm First deliv ery 1 sheet Short path R1 S1 S2 S3 Second de livery Third deliv ery Delivery not supported Since the same drive is used for the delivery from the third delivery and the duplex path the productivity is lower than that of the delivery from the first second delivery Jam Detection Code Symbol Sensor...

Page 145: ...Third Delivery Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P006 bit 1 1 Paper present xx0A PS12 Reverse Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P003 bit 9 1 Paper present xx0B PS22 Pre Registration Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P005 bit 5 1 Paper present xx0C PS11 Arch Sensor Yes P005 bit 4 1 Paper present Yes Detected No Not detected xx 01 Delay 02 Stationary 07 Wrap 0A Power ON 0B Door open 2 Technology 133 ...

Page 146: ...r Single Color Small Print Full Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 US 101 108 229 230 321 322 000 UL model type2 Total 2 Total Black 2 Copy Full Color Single Color Large Copy Full Color Single Color Small Print Full Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 US 102 109 229 230 321 322 000 General mod el Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Print Full Color Lar...

Page 147: ...y default Can be changed in service mode Description of symbols Large Large size paper when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction Small Small size paper when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction Total When a piece of paper is delivered the counter is advanced by 1 2 Sided The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2 sided mode Change the country code of CON...

Page 148: ...ools paper delivered from the first delivery and second delivery Drum Unit and Toner Bottle E806 0100 E806 0101 FM02 Power Supply Cooling Fan Cools the Low Voltage Power Supply and Main Controller E804 0000 FM03 Motor Fan Cools the Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor Second Delivery Motor and Third Delivery Motor E806 0200 E806 0201 FM04 Controller Fan Cools the Main Controller E880 0001 Option Speed Contro...

Page 149: ... 2 The fan runs at half speed when the Buffer Path Unit is installed and the environment temperature becomes high Otherwise it stops Heater Control Name Role Cassette Heater host machine Prevents paper in the Cassettes 1 2 from absorbing moisture Cassette Heater Cassette Pedestal Prevents paper in the Cassettes 3 4 from absorbing moisture Reader Heater Prevents condensation on the Scanner Unit and...

Page 150: ...Reader Heater 3 3V All night Power Supply AC DC 24V 12V 5V 3 3V 6V Inside Heater J303 J306 J313 J321 J315 J302 J100 J1186 Host Machine Cassette Heater Non all night Circuit 5V Power Supply DC DC 24V Power Supply AC DC 12V Power Supply AC DC Energy Saving Function Overview There are Standby mode and Sleep mode as the power supply mode of this machine Further Sleep mode is divided into the following...

Page 151: ...ing this mode and is shifted to Standby mode when the Control Panel Power Switch is pressed When any of the check items in Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode Check Items on page 139 applies the mode is not shifted to Deep Sleep mode Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode Check Items Settings in Settings Registration Preferences Timer Energy Settings Sleep Mode Energy Use High During ...

Page 152: ... supply power to the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB and Main Controller PCB Consequently the Touch Panel can be operated after 7 seconds from turning ON the Main Power Switch Even when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF power is supplied to the following PCBs Quick startup setting ON Quick startup setting OFF Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Areas sup plied with AC Power is supplied Power is supplied L...

Page 153: ...g related information A job is being executed in standby Print Copy Send Fax Report Forwarding Storage processing etc During fax communication phone communication During distribution of device information During export import by RUI A file is being opened read written in Access Stored Files Network common to SMB WebDAV During rebuilding with the HDD Encryption Board installed Others Accumulated ti...

Page 154: ...after exiting from Deep Sleep symptoms such as not being able to acquire device status print or log in with a log in application may occur If these symptoms cause problems take one of the following measures Do not enter Deep Sleep from Settings Registration Preferences Timer Energy Settings Sleep Mode Energy Use High Disable the spanning tree feature in the hub Request the user to install a hub su...

Page 155: ...t since all settings can be used a security risk is involved DepartmentID Au thentication Department ID Authentication is performed with department ID Login service management is performed on the Enhanced System Application Management screen of Service Management Service hereinafter referred to as SMS Management of user authentication method is performed on the user management screen of each login...

Page 156: ...y authentication from Web browsers not using SSL Network Ports Used when Using an LDAP Server Port No Application 636 server side Communication with the LDAP server using LDAP when using SSL 389 server side Communication with the LDAP server using LDAP when not using SSL Specification of User Authentication Item Specification No of local device users Up to 5000 Maximum number of domains Active Dir...

Page 157: ...nagement screen of the Remote UI http IP address of the device 8000 userauth List User Management screen Server authentication Active Directory authentication It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO H User authentication is performed with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory environment It is a user authentication where the user is authent...

Page 158: ...ce Service and MEAP Application Setting Information Management LDAP Server cannot be selected as the type of the authentication server on the SSO H Configuration page Moreover it is not possible to access the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen Simple bind a method where the password is not encrypted is used as the bind authentication between UA and LDAP server It is therefore ...

Page 159: ...Microsoft Windows Server 2012Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise SP2 x86 Settings Common to Active Directory Authentication and LDAP Authentication Device settings When using LDAP authentication the following settings must be appropriately specified TCP IP settings DNS server settings when using Active Directory as the authentication server Date and time settings when using Kerberos authentic...

Page 160: ...ation in the RLS Remote Login Service window The user information user name and password used is the information for user authentication Therefore it is an authentication method that can be used when using User Authentication as the login service The procedure for logging in is indicated below The login procedures are as follows 1 Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same ne...

Page 161: ...n below NOTE From this device password authentication is set to Stopped by default To log in to SMS with password authentication it is necessary to log in to SMS with RLS authentication and set SMS Installer Service Password Authentication to Start in System Application Management For information on the procedure refer to Setting the method to login to SMS on page 168 1 Access SMS from the browser...

Page 162: ...ming authentication with the user name and password of an administrator RLS Authentication and performing authentication with the dedicated password for SMS Password Authentication RLS authentication In order to access SMS using RLS authentication the environment should comply with the environment for using User Authentication as the login service For details refer to PC Environment of Administrat...

Page 163: ...t supported in SMS the display language is selected according to method for when Password Authentication is used as indicated above Device compatibility with the MEAP application To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application check the devices supported by the MEAP application Depending on the application the device s firmware may require version upgrade Resources availabil...

Page 164: ...to run Update the license which has already expired Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application These license management functions can be performed from the MEAP Application Management screen The main license management functions are as follows Adding a license When the license has expired you can add a license file Disabling a License File Before uninstalling the...

Page 165: ...he application and is the name bundle vendor declared in a statement within the application program License Status It indicates the status of the license specifically None no license is needed Not Installed no license has been installed Installed the appropriate license has been installed Invalid the license has been invalidated Overlimt the license has been used beyond its permitted limit License...

Page 166: ...s long as the MEAP application supports these services you can perform data management tasks all together In case of devices and MEAP application that do not support the service App1 Dedicated management tool Config data App1 format App1 Device Pref data Log data Setting and reference App2 Dedicated management tool Config data App2 Pref data Log data App1 format App1 format App2 format App2 format...

Page 167: ...e authentication information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later Comparison of Functions Volatile Credential Persistent Credential Registered information Character strings and arbitrary Java objects Character strings only User ID Password Domain Arbitrary character strings Lifetime Registration At login the login application and at any timing of registration by an...

Page 168: ... the device For details refer to Top Security MEAP Settings Using the SSL in the e Manual Key pair and server certificate settings To use SMS via SSL connection it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as the key to be used Since a key default key that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as standard on this device advance setting of the key pair and server c...

Page 169: ...NOTE If Print Server is connected do not specify port 8080 If port 8080 is specified it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where the MEAP authentication application is running Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS Print Server Unit to redirect to the device As for port on HTTPS server it only applies to the device that supports SSL function 2 Restart the device if the port numbe...

Page 170: ... If you are updating an existing application stop the application then install the new application or its license file You will not be able to update an application while it is running NOTE The license file is provided in text file format enabling to view in a text editor The application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which device to install with the license f...

Page 171: ...on is complete the MEAP application management page is displayed NOTE Since the status of applications installed with Only Install selected in Operation to Perform is set to Installed it is necessary to click Start to change their status to Started Procedure to Start and Stop a MEAP Application 1 Log in to the SMS and click MEAP Application Management 2 Technology 159 ...

Page 172: ...opped 3 Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either Started or Stopped Procedure Adding a License File 1 Log on to SMS 2 On MEAP Application Management click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file 2 Technology 160 ...

Page 173: ...ng the application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file Once suspended the status of the license will be Not Installed and its application will no longer be available for use You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial number If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure use the tran...

Page 174: ...pplication you want to uninstall and click the name of the application 3 On Application License Information page click License Management 4 License Management page appears Click Disable 5 Click Yes 2 Technology 162 ...

Page 175: ...the same device serial number 1 Login to SMS and click the name of the application you want 2 On Application License Information page click License Management 3 License Management page appears To download click Download 4 When you have selected Download specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen 2 Technology 163 ...

Page 176: ...ad been installed last time Download and save the license file before deleting the application Procedure for Downloading a License for Forwarding 1 Log in to SMS stop the application to be forwarded Procedure to Start and Stop a MEAP Application on page 159 2 Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender https IP address of device 8443 sms ForwardLicense 2 Technology 164 ...

Page 177: ...sable on the Disable License File 6 The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed Click Yes 7 When Download on the Download Delete Transfer License File becomes effective click Download 8 Specify the preservation place of the file according to the instruction of the screen 2 Technology 165 ...

Page 178: ... support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device NOTE When requesting issuance of license for forwarding inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No of the device as sender and of the name of product name and serial No of the forwarding destination 12 Install application using the license for forwarding ...

Page 179: ...or Only Install in Operation to Perform and click Install Login Service Uninstallation Procedure In order to uninstall a login service the service needs to be stopped Installed status User Authentication and DepartmentID Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped 1 Access SMS and select Enhanced System Application Management 2 Technology 167 ...

Page 180: ...e Authentication CAUTION To ensure the security it is recommended to change the password and the user name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of shipment immediately after you have started using SSO H Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server...

Page 181: ...in to SMS and select Chage Password 2 Enter the current password and a new password and then click the Change NOTE The Reset on the Change Password screen is used to clear the value entered in the text field It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the default value Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function Service mode The location of the service mode setting for disa...

Page 182: ...s Item code Description Disable integrated authentication The integrated authentication function is disabled regardless of the authentication method Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local de vice authentication The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server...

Page 183: ...s adequate However the Send function consumes 1 it must be 19 in practice Authentication application is not included in this number The MEAP application which can be started simultaneously is up to 19 Authentication application is not included in this number CAUTION To install an application the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file ...

Page 184: ...u checked in the previous section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is output Follow the steps below when confirming information 1 Select Settings Registration Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Print System Information NOTE When System Manager ID and PIN are set go to Top screen and log in as System Manager to continue jobs 2 Press Yes NOTE ME...

Page 185: ...in the MEAP application area and recovering the backup data In the case of MEAP installed devices the application is license managed so the application needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD In that case a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and configuration information need to be recovered and these procedures pose heavy ...

Page 186: ...ST to recovery of the data When Initialize All Data Settings is executed the key used to combine encrypted backup data SMS password etc is initialized which makes it impossible to combine the data It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been recovered using SST If you inadvertently executed Initialize All Data Settings and can no longer access SMS the SMS login password ...

Page 187: ... numbers enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question Formatting the HDD Procedure to format the hard disk Follow the following procedure to format the HDD 1 Connecting to the device Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of Backup Procedure on page 497 2 Formatting the HDD Selec...

Page 188: ...ure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2 Replacing the drive Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD and replace the drive 3 Formatting HDD Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD on page 175 4 Restorering the backup file Restore the backup data referring to Backup Restore on page 495 5 Importing user information As necessary make login service selections and import u...

Page 189: ...ction the USB device can use the MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings Using this function requires the conditions below Supported MEAP SpecVer 26 Describe the idVendeor VID and idProdutc PID of USB device in the manifest or activate deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timin...

Page 190: ...nnected connected freely However do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep when in sleep with setting low at the power consumption in sleep It is out of an operation guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep When USB device is attached to device devices do not shift to deep sleep mode Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Setting...

Page 191: ...e and connection speed can be indicated D Device Information of USB devices is shown P Product Product information of USB devices is shown Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized here S String The character string embedded in a USB device is shown A manufacture name and a product name can be recognized here C Configure The configuration information of a USB device is shown mark is to know wheth...

Page 192: ...he status using a specific USB device AppID Application ID VID Vendor ID PID Product ID NOTE By starting stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application the driver settings of the USB device may be changed If the device needs to be restarted following this setting change a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed Troubleshooting When SMS Cannot Be Accessed If you forgot the passwo...

Page 193: ... SMS of the same device An example of the exclusive control message If you cannot log in due to exclusive control you need to ask the other user to log out before you can try again NOTE If you close the browser without logging out the session remains active In that case you cannot log in again If this problem occurs you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected Or you can restart ...

Page 194: ...cking the foregoing conditions contact the support department of the sales company Points to Note When Enabling the Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Setting If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device the following problems will occur The Quick Startup Settings for Main Power setting cannot be enabled If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep m...

Page 195: ... about extra applications It will start up only those system software files including SMS that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up When you have made changes and restart the device the control panel will indicate MPSF in its lower right corner The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut down the equipment will not ...

Page 196: ...Start service mode again after rebooting the device and check that MPS is no longer displayed at the upper left of the screen Collection of MEAP Console Logs When debugging a MEAP application console logs need to be collected in some cases MEAP console logs can be obtained with the Device DebugLog Utility Make sure to use it For details see the instruction manual of the Device DebugLog Utility 2 T...

Page 197: ...㼍㼘㼑㼟㻌㻯㼛㼙㼜㼍㼚㼥 㻵㼚㼠㼑㼞㼚㼑㼠 Features and benefits E RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front end processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment Major Functions Service Browser Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge and is used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected t...

Page 198: ...nction 1 In the following cases service mode menu data is not transmitted When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E RDS at power on When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is detected When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an alarm or a service call error ended in failure If a new alarm or servi...

Page 199: ...E MODE COPIER Function INSTALL RGW PORT Default 443 URL setting of UGW SERVICE MODE COPIER Function INSTALL RGW ADR Default https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 3 If the e Maintenance imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid be sure to turn OFF the E RDS setting E RDS 0 4 With this machine a communication test can be conducted from the Counter Check on the Control Panel When conducting...

Page 200: ... settings to factory setting values For the setting values to be initialized see the section of Initializing E RDS settings on page 190 2 Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary and turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine Installation of the CA certificate Perform installation from SST or Remote UI Deletion of the CA certificate When the following operation ...

Page 201: ... the Troubleshooting on page 192 and repeat until OK is displayed NOTE The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM LOG By performing the communication test with UGW E RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation Steps to Service Browser settings 1 In the following service modes enable a service browser Select COPIER Function ...

Page 202: ...certificate file even if initialization of E RDS is executed the status is not returned to the factory default When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file it is required to delete the certificate file after E RDS initialization and install the factory default CA certificate file For detailed procedures see Steps to E RDS settings on page 188 step 3 FAQ N...

Page 203: ...busy try later errors if the power supply of network equipment such as HUB is made prolonged OFF No 7 Q Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW the reason is what A If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately after error occurred once It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does not take a time from the controller of t...

Page 204: ...at power on 2 Sent after recovery from sleep mode No 13 Q What is the number of the network port used by E RDS A The port number used by E RDS for communication with UGW is 443 If this setting is changed an error occurs during communication with UGW Therefore this setting should not be changed unless otherwise instructed No 14 Q After the setting for E RDS was made the IP address of the host machi...

Page 205: ...een display Response from the host YES Proceed to Remedy 2 NO Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a as the IP address and then touch the Start button Does the screen display Response from the host YES Proceed to Remedy 2 NO There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong Reconfirm the address with the user s system administrator Remedy 2 Troubleshooting using communicatio...

Page 206: ...formation related to E RDS is also deleted Therefore when 7 days have passed without performing a communication test after registering the E RDS machine again the device setting becomes invalid Remedy Perform a communication test before the device setting becomes invalid No 4 Symptom There was a log indicating Network is not ready try later in error details of COM LOG list Cause A certain problem ...

Page 207: ... is not exist Blank schedule data have been re ceived from UGW Perform and complete a communication test COM TEST 4 0xxx 0003 Communication test is not performed Communication test has not completed Perform and complete a communication test COM TEST 5 84xx 0003 E RDS switch is setted OFF A communication test has been attemp ted with the E RDS switch being OFF Set E RDS switch E RDS to 1 and then p...

Page 208: ...01 ugwde vice net ugw agentif010 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready try later Communication attempted without con firming network connection just after turning OFF and then ON the main pow er of this machine in which the network preparations are not ready Check the network connection as per the initial procedures described in the troubleshooting Perform a communication test COM TEST about 60 second...

Page 209: ...onse time out Due to network congestion etc the re sponse from UGW does not come with in the specified time HTTPS level time out If this error occurs when the communi cation test is being run or Service Browser is being set try again after a period of time 31 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL and UGW cannot be accessed Path is wrong Check that the value of URL of UGW RG...

Page 210: ...n Update UGW Manual Yes Yes Yes Manual Download Update On site Update via Service mode Local UI Auto No Yes Yes 1 Manual Yes Yes Yes 1 You can select the version allowed Remote Update UGW linked Download and Update Full Remote Update If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance full remote firmware update is available on this devi...

Page 211: ...ing 3 methods by introducing CDS See User Manual for detailed information Distribution Method Download Com manded by Update Timing Downloadable Firmware Versions Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver Manual down load update via Local UI Local UI Auto No No Yes 1 Manual No No Yes 1 Manual down load upload via Remote UI Remote UI Auto No No Yes 1 Manual No No Yes 1 Special down load upload via Remote U...

Page 212: ...download and update b UGW linked download c Manual download and update Operator of each company User operation Firmware Market Release UGW setting for distribution UGW linked 1 Automatic download Distribution setting Download Via Service mode Local UI Automatic update Apply Update Via Service mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User ...

Page 213: ...rrent use of Updater functions Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with Remote UI Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools Users logged in SMS Service Management Service are unable to use Update functions from Remote UI Using Updater function from Remote UI Upon the following operations done Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for ce...

Page 214: ...er For updating of firmware Installation Meth od Setting Sales Company s HQ Network Settings Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button Enabling Manual Update Button of Remote UI Setting Sales Company s HQ on page 202 Network Set tings on page 203 Enabling UGW Link on page 206 Enabling Update Firmware Button on page 206 Enabling Manual Update Button of Remote UI on page 207 UGW linked Down ...

Page 215: ...ecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method Refer to user manual of the device for details NOTE See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network Before using UGW link or Settings Registratoin screen see the sections below to prepare as required Enabling UGW Link on page 206 Enabling Update Firmware Button on page 206 Enabling Install Application...

Page 216: ...ong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 5 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set Communication Test NOTE Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Technology 204 ...

Page 217: ...ion server to execute the communication test to the distribution server Using the download file information for communication test the contents for test are downloaded from the file server for the communication test to the file server 5 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is shown Press OK button to exit this operation 2 Technology 205 ...

Page 218: ...n If Distribute Firmware is not shown on Customer Management screen of UGW WebPortal appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware Distribution Information Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation Enabling Update Firmware Button To allow users to install firmware using Updater the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance Set 1 in...

Page 219: ...al PCs the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance Set 1 in the following service mode COPIER Option FNC SW LOCLFIRM Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled LOCLFIRM 0 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled LOCLFIRM 1 System Management Operations Setting Log Level 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Technology 207 ...

Page 220: ...g Level dropdown list Log Level Select one of 5 levels ranging from 0 to 4 See the table below for logs output in each level Log Level Log Output Trace Information Important Mes sage Ordinary Error System Error 0 Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Technology 208 ...

Page 221: ... MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors System Error Logs for internal system errors 5 Press OK button to set the selected log level Now the log level is successfully set Displaying Logs Update Logs 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Software Management Settings button 3 Press Select Log Display button 4 Press Displ...

Page 222: ...d Firmware Update Logs are shown Press OK button to exit this operation System Logs 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Software Management Settings button 3 Press Select Log Display button 4 Press Display System Logs button 2 Technology 210 ...

Page 223: ...ection of Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more detailed information Communication Test 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Software Management Settings button 3 Press Test Communication button 2 Technology 211 ...

Page 224: ...rmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater See the section of Version Upgrade Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more detailed information Setting information and logs update logs system logs are carried over Formatting Hard Disk Since Updater is a MEAP application its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP application storage area on PC via SST during formatti...

Page 225: ...imultaneously No 3 Q How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW linked download and update done A You can confirm this in E mail or the Device List on UGW linked screen E mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion On UGW linked screen search the device of yo...

Page 226: ...ing firmware download A Yes Cancel button is shown No 10 Q E mail is sent to users to notify update completion Can service technicians also receive such a notification A Yes The notification E mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters his her E mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting Multiple E mail addresses can be entered in the field Delimit each...

Page 227: ...date via Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Special Download and Up date via Remote UI Yes Yes For install Application Installation Method Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button Network Settings on page 203 Enabling Install Application Options Button on page 206 LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes No 2 Q Ho...

Page 228: ...evice Touch panel display Export by service mode USB device internal HDD Even if data has been exported by one method it can be exported by another one E g Data which was exported by remote UI can be imported by service mode For details of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console DCM Plug in refer to the e Manual of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console DCM Plug in Items to be Exported The follow...

Page 229: ...sword is set when 0 character is entered The setting in which no password is set is allowed only export by service mode No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive At the time of following setting host matchine does not recognize USB device The DCM function is not usable too Settings Registration Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for Externa...

Page 230: ...by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode Refer to Import Procedure on page 220 of Import Export by Service Mode External Import Export by Service Mode External Import export by service mode allows the selection between USB device and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM files The procedure of import export when USB device is selected is shown below The DCM files to be ex...

Page 231: ...ssword Character string of software keyboard 0 to 32 characters No password is set when 0 character is entered No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive Limitations regarding the DCM file no password DCM files exported without password can only be imported by service mode They cannot be imported by Settings Registration 2 Technology 219 ...

Page 232: ... number Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS DCM file format iR ADV CXXXX_ZZZ99999_V0170_0001_YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS dcm Import Procedure NOTE It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device No firmware registration is necessary When necessary copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB device Do not change the extension from dcm on...

Page 233: ...USB device is displayed Select SELECT enter the number displayed on the left side of the file name to select and press OK NOTE Up to 8 DCM files are displayed in one screen It is necessary to switch screens when there are more than 8 files 5 Confirm that is displayed on the right side of the selected file and press 2 Technology 221 ...

Page 234: ...Settings Preferences Network AppleTalk Settings Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings E Mail Address Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings POP Login Name Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings POP Pssword Function Settings Send Fax Settings Set Line Line n Register Unit Telephone Number Function Settings Send ...

Page 235: ...cedure of import export when internal HDD is selected is shown below It can be used when recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for troubleshooting etc NOTE DCM must not be used when replacing PCBs Be sure to perform backup of DCON RCON in service mode Maximum of 2 files can be saved in the host machine s HDD Export Procedure 1 Log in to service mode ...

Page 236: ...eyboard and then press OK NOTE Limitations regarding the password Character string of software keyboard 0 to 32 characters No password is set when 0 character is entered No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive 5 Select BACKUP and press OK to execute the export process 2 Technology 224 ...

Page 237: ...rted file is shown below Model name Serial Number Main Controler firm ware version DCM Job management number Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS DCM file format iR ADV CXXXX_ZZZ99999_V0170_0001_YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS dcm Import Procedure 1 Log in to service mode and press RESTORE 2 Select LIST enter 2 and press OK 2 Technology 225 ...

Page 238: ...elect PASSWD enter a password and then press OK NOTE is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed is displayed after the password is entered You can select REPLACE to import a file exported from another machine as a file exported from this machine The target items for importing are changed Refer to List of items which can be imported on p...

Page 239: ... same model the same series Case C Different model Import to a different machine of a different model a different series Settings Registration Menu Settings For items that can be imported as setting information from the Settings Registration menu refer to Top Remote UI Import Export Function Available Settings Information Table with the Import All Function in the User s Guide Service Mode Settings...

Page 240: ...No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS M Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS M Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH OFS Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH OFS M Yes No No COPIER ...

Page 241: ... EXP LED PR EXP K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPY2 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPM2 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPC2 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXPK2 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP M Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Yes No No COPI...

Page 242: ...o No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP4 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP5 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP6 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP7 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP8 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGM Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGC Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGK1 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR OFF Yes No No COPIER ADJUST ...

Page 243: ... VL15 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL16 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGK2 Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG HS Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG HS C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG HS K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST IMG REG RE...

Page 244: ...COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK K Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 Y Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 M Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 C Yes No No COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 K Yes No No COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS Yes Yes Yes COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW PORT Yes Yes Yes COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW ADR Yes ...

Page 245: ...OPTION FNC SW INTROT 2 Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW DMAX SW Yes No No COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW NWERR SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV AUTO DH Yes No No COPIER OPTION NETWORK STS PORT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK CMD PORT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW BK 4CSW Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODELSZ2 Yes No No COPIER OPTION CLEANING OHP PTH Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 Yes No ...

Page 246: ...PIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THK Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW ARCDT SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ADJ VPP Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG MCON AST SEL Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ADJ BLNK Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL2 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL3 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL4 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL5 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL6 Ye...

Page 247: ...es Yes COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI NAVI Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW STND PNL Yes Yes No COPIER OPTION FNC SW INVALPDL Yes Yes No COPIER OPTION FNC SW IMGCNTPR Yes Yes No COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS MEAP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW LOCLFIRM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT1 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG S...

Page 248: ...PIER OPTION IMG MCON BGE OFS Yes No No COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW USER DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW SDTM DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW NO LGOUT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV BK Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV CL Yes No No COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW WT WARN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW DF D...

Page 249: ... ENV SET LES CNDS Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV DNS Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TM20 Yes No No COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB23 Yes No No COPIER OPTION FNC SW PREXP SW Yes No No COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSL30 Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION ENV SET CLD REV Yes Yes No COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW SPRN USR Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST1 P1 Yes Yes No COPIER OPTION CST CST2 P1 Yes Yes No COPIER OPT...

Page 250: ...Yes COPIER OPTION USER 2C CT SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER LDAP SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER FROM OF Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER DOM ADD Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER FILE OF Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER MAIL OF Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER IFAX OF Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER LDAP DEF Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER FREE DSP Yes No No COPIER OPTION USER TNRB SW Yes Yes Yes COPIE...

Page 251: ...ER ADJUST LA SPEED Yes No No SORTER ADJUST STP F1 Yes No No SORTER ADJUST STP F2 Yes No No SORTER ADJUST STP R1 Yes No No SORTER ADJUST STP R2 Yes No No SORTER ADJUST STP 2P Yes No No SORTER ADJUST SDL STP Yes No No SORTER ADJUST SDL ALG Yes No No SORTER ADJUST ST ALG1 Yes No No SORTER ADJUST SW UP RL Yes No No SORTER ADJUST PRCS RET Yes No No SORTER ADJUST UP CL Yes No No SORTER ADJUST DW CL Yes ...

Page 252: ...es No No SORTER OPTION MSTP TMG Yes Yes Yes SORTER OPTION DWCL BND Yes No No SORTER OPTION FR ST PO Yes Yes No SORTER OPTION MSTP WT Yes Yes No SORTER OPTION TRY PSTN Yes Yes No SORTER OPTION TRY CRNT Yes Yes No SORTER OPTION PADL TM Yes Yes No SORTER OPTION FR ST SW Yes Yes No FAX Large Case A Case B Case C SSSW Tam ura Tam ura Menu Tam ura Tam ura Num Tam ura Tam ura Ncu Type Tam ura Tam ura ISD...

Page 253: ...Periodical Service 3 List of periodically replacement parts consumable parts and locations for cleaning 242 Cleaning Parts 244 ...

Page 254: ...ent Unit ITB Unit Remov ing the Pri mary Transfer Roller Y M C BK on page 333 5 Primary Transfer Roller Y M C 3 180 000 pa ges Replace DRBL 1 TR ROLC Parent Unit ITB Unit 6 Secondary Trans fer Outer Roller FE3 47 83 1 180 000 pa ges Replace DRBL 1 2TR ROLL 35 0013 ALARM 3 Remov ing the Secon dary Transfer Outer Roller on page 324 7 Drum Unit Y 1 Replace DRBL 1 PT DR Y 35 0070 ALARM 3 8 Drum Unit M...

Page 255: ...0 2 180 000 pa ges Replace DRBL 1 FX LW BS Parent Unit Fix ing Unit 19 Waste Toner Con tainer FM1 A606 1 100 000 im ages Replace DRBL 1 WST TNR Intermit tent print ing of 3 sheets A4 plain paper per job 5 image duty each col or 30 color ratio Remov ing the Waste To ner Con tainer on page 323 20 DADF Pickup Roller Unit DADF FM1 D470 1 80 000 sheets Replace DRBL 2 DF PU RL 35 0091 ALARM 3 21 Separat...

Page 256: ...Patch Sensor Clean with a blower Clean with a tightly wrung cotton swab when soiling or foreign matter cannot be removed As needed When ITB Unit re placement 2 Pre transfer Cover Sheet When there is soiling or foreign matter clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol As needed 3 Periodical Service 244 ...

Page 257: ...lex Merging Roller 9 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 10 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 1 11 Duplex Roller 1 12 Duplex Roller 2 13 First Delivery Roller 14 Second Delivery Roller 15 Third Delivery Roller 16 Rowel Block Assembly 17 Tray Duct Assembly Lower 18 Copy Board Glass Both side 19 Stream Reading Glass Both side 20 Scanner Mirror 1 to 4 21 White Plate 22 Vertical Size Plate 23 Dustproof Glass Cl...

Page 258: ...acement Cleaning Procedure List 248 List of Parts 250 List of Connectors 261 External Cover Interior System 277 Original Exposure System 295 Controller System 303 Laser Exposure System 315 Image Formation System 318 Fixing System 358 Pickup Feed System 365 ...

Page 259: ...g the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight thin plates are used in some parts of this...

Page 260: ...3 Removing the Controller Cover on page 303 Removing the HDD on page 303 Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 306 Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 308 Removing the Fax Unit on page 309 Removing the Controller Fan on page 310 Laser Exposure System Laser Exposure System on page 315 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit on page 315 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass on page 316 Image Formation System I...

Page 261: ...g the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller on page 365 Removing the Right Door Unit on page 368 Removing the First Delivery Unit on page 371 Removing the Second Delivery Unit on page 372 Removing the Third Delivery Unit on page 374 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit on page 374 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit on page 376 Removing the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Unit Option on page 377 Removing t...

Page 262: ... Cover 6 Reader Rear Cover 7 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Right 8 Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box 9 Reader Front Cover Small 10 Reader Right Retaining Cover 11 Reader Front Cover 12 Right Front Upper Cover 13 Front Cover Upper 14 Front Cover 15 Cassette 1 Front Cover 16 Cassette 2 Front Cover 17 Waste Toner Assembly Cover 18 Handle Cover 19 Service Book Holder 20 Left Cover Lower 21 Blind Cover 22 Le...

Page 263: ...ivery Tray Support Plate 6 Inner Delivery Cover 7 Inner Cover Right Upper 8 Reverse Trailing Edge Guide 9 Reverse Guide Cover 10 Inner Right Cover 11 Inner Blind Cover 12 Fan Holder 13 Front Inner Upper Cover 14 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Bk 15 Drum Unit Retaining Cover C 16 Drum Unit Retaining Cover M 17 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Y 18 Front Inner Lower Cover 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 251 ...

Page 264: ...ntrol Panel Upper Cover 2 Control Panel Cover Lower 3 Control Panel Cover Rear 4 Control Panel Hinge Inner Cover 5 Control Panel Hinge Cover Right 6 Control Panel Lower Cover 7 Control Panel Cover Base Upper 8 Control Panel Lower Cover Small 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 252 ...

Page 265: ...Power Supply Cord Cover 8 Environment Heater Switch Cover 9 Connector Cover 10 Handle Cover 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 12 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray 13 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly 14 Right Cover Lower 15 Right Door Lower 16 Right Cover Front Lower 17 Right Cover Front Upper 18 Main Power Supply Switch Cover 19 Right Door 20 Third Delivery Outlet Cover 21 Read...

Page 266: ...nit CBk M06 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor Lifter Drive Unit M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M08 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor Main Drive Unit M09 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit M10 Developing Motor Main Drive Unit M11 Duplex Reverse Motor Reverse Duplexing Drive Unit M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M17 Waste Toner Feed Motor ...

Page 267: ...ng Fan on page 280 FM03 Motor Fan Removing the Motor Fan on page 283 FM04 Controller Fan Main Controller PCB Clutch CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 No Parts Name Main Unit Reference CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch Y Main Drive Unit CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M Main Drive Unit CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C Main Drive Unit CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk Main Drive Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Clean...

Page 268: ...ter Solenoid Registration Patch Sensor Unit SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid First Delivery Heater TH01_03 TH01_02 TH01_01 TP01 H02 H03 H01 No Parts Name Main Unit Reference H01 Fixing heater Fixing Unit H02 Cassette Heater Cassette Heater Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 256 ...

Page 269: ...supply sensor C Bottle Drive Unit CBk PS29 Toner supply sensor Bk Bottle Drive Unit CBk PS30 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit PS31 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit PS32 Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit UN21 Toner Density Sensor Y Drum Unit Y UN22 Toner Density Sensor M Drum Unit M UN23 Toner De...

Page 270: ...st Delivery Sensor First Delivery PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS20 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS22 Pre Registration Sensor Shutter Registration Unit PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit PS33 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor Main Drive Unit PS51 Second delivery Reverse senso...

Page 271: ...an Unit SW04 Main Power Supply Switch SW10 Dehumidification Switch SW11 Right Door Open Close Detection Switch SW12 AC Interlock Switch SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch SW15 Cassette 2 size switch A SW16 Cassette 2 size switch B SW26 Front Door Switch Front Upper Inner Cover Unit SW27 Right Upper Door Open Close Detection Switch PCB UN03 UN01 UN04 UN05 UN02 UN12 UN13 UN14 UN15 UN16 4 Parts Replacement ...

Page 272: ...emoving the Main Controller PCB on page 306 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB UN13 Pre exposure LED PCB Y Pre exposure LED Unit UN14 Pre exposure LED PCB M Pre exposure LED Unit UN15 Pre exposure LED PCB C Pre exposure LED Unit UN16 Pre exposure LED PCB Bk Pre exposure LED Unit UN10 UN29 UN31 UN08 UN09 No Parts Name Main Unit Reference UN08 Y M Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit UN09 C Bk Laser Dr...

Page 273: ...List of Connectors J1006 J1007 J1121 J313 J110 J321 J17 J40 J29 J23 J28 J13 J15 J14 J12 J26 J32 J25 J20 J22 J18 J6 J7 J3 J5 J24 J21 J10 J8 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 261 ...

Page 274: ...J1 J2 J1001 J1004 J1003 J1002 J1008 J1007 J3 J41 J1 J2 J2 J4 J314 J30 J27 J16 J304 J6 J7 J4 J2 J2 J8 J5 J403 J4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 262 ...

Page 275: ...J121 J134 J182 J100 J115 J302 J323 J315 J322 J302 J1001 J199 J190 J1002 J1115 J721 J1338M J1114 J1195 J1189D J1342 J1008 J305 J306 J301 J1336 J1336 J301 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 263 ...

Page 276: ...J1340 J1260 J1251 J1261 J1199 J1033 J124 J132 J136 J1027 J1028 J1030 J1031 J1029 J1026 J1045 J1220 J1221 J1222 J1339 J1063 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 264 ...

Page 277: ...J801 J203 J202 J204 J201 J206 J401 J19 J502 J501 J111 J112 J114 J125 J113 J1180 J1120 J1119 J1025 J1122 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 265 ...

Page 278: ...J1335 J1066 J1022 J1146 J1050 J1051 J130 J1052 J1053 J1333 J120 J128 J130 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 266 ...

Page 279: ...J135 J133 J127 J1177 J1107 J1260L J1334 J1059 J1060 J1061 J1062 J1213 J1057 J1058 J1011 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 267 ...

Page 280: ...J1046 J1113 J1112 J701 J702 J1341 J1110 J1111 J123 J122 J1168 J1019 J1017 J1079 J1012 J1250 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 268 ...

Page 281: ...J1167 J1337 J1338L J1169 J1201 J1054 J1190 J1103 J1202 J1203 J1204 J1205 J1189 J129 J131 J139 J1423 J1424 J1425 J1426 J138 J137 J126 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 269 ...

Page 282: ...J5001 J5011 J5014 J5015 J5007 J5006 J5003 J5009 J2101 J305 J5010 J5013 J35 J38 J36 J33 J37 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 270 ...

Page 283: ...Voltage Power Supply PCB J1001 J1002 TP01 Fixing Temperature fuse J302 UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J1001 J1002 J1115 H01 Fixing heater J303 UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J1108 J1108 SW10 Environment Switch J303 UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J1003 J1181 Cassette Pedistal Heater Cassette Feeding Unit J305 UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J1004 HTR1 Reader Heater Reader J305 UN01 Low V...

Page 284: ...troller PCB J1161 J1017 J1017 SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid J122 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1161 J1012 PS13 Fixing pressure release sensor J122 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1161 J1079 PS14 First Delivery Sensor J122 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1161 J1250 PS12 Reverse Sensor J124 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1032 J1340 SW11 Right Door Open Close Detection Switch J124 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1104 J1026 PS08 Cassette ...

Page 285: ...4 DC Controller PCB J1203 J1203 CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1204 J1204 CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1205 J1205 CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1090 J1189 PS33 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sen sor J129 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1054 M02 Bk Drum _ ITB Motor J129 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1103...

Page 286: ...0 3 Way Unit Driver PCB J1345 J1341 PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor 3 Way Unit J702 UN10 3 Way Unit Driver PCB J1110 PS51 Second delivery Re verse sensor 3 Way Unit J702 UN10 3 Way Unit Driver PCB J1112 M30 Reverce Motor 3 Way Unit J702 UN10 3 Way Unit Driver PCB J1113 M31 Second Delivery Motor 3 Way Unit J182 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1099 Buffer Path Inner Finisher Buffer Path Inner Finishe...

Page 287: ...ntroller PCB USB Device Port J4 UN05 Main Controller PCB J1003 UN20 Control Panel J23 UN05 Main Controller PCB HDD J29 UN05 Main Controller PCB HDD J35 UN05 Main Controller PCB J1408 J1410 PCB1 ADF Laser Driver PCB ADF J38 UN05 Main Controller PCB J1409 J1411 PCB1 ADF Laser Driver PCB ADF J37 UN05 Main Controller PCB J5001 PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor rear Reader J37 UN05 Main Controll...

Page 288: ... PCB J5 UN68 Fax PCB 2line FAX J16 UN05 Main Controller PCB J403 UN68 Fax PCB 2line FAX J4 UN66 Fax PCB 1line J41 J41 SP1 N A FAX J3 UN66 Fax PCB 1line J4 UN67 Fax Interface PCB 1line FAX J6 UN66 Fax PCB 1line J8 UN68 Fax PCB 2line FAX J4 UN68 Fax PCB 2line J4 UN69 Fax Interface PCB 2line FAX J7 UN66 Fax PCB 1line J1116 J304 UN01 Low Voltage Power Sup ply PCB FAX J2 UN69 Fax Interface PCB 2line J1...

Page 289: ... direction in the figure below to fully open it 1 3 2 CAUTION Moving the Lever Assembly to the following position changes the open close status of the host machine s Right Door A Position that opens the host machine s Right Door B Position that fully opens the host machine s Right Door A B A B Removing the Front Door 1 Open the Front Door 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 277 ...

Page 290: ...ion 1 Open the Front Door Removing the Front Door on page 277 2 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right Door on page 277 3 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 358 4 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Procedure 1 Remove the Right Front Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 278 ...

Page 291: ... the Inner Right Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 3 Pull out the cassette 1 and open the Right Cover Front Upper 2 2 Screws 3 2x 3 1 2 4 Remove the connector 1 of the Front Fan 1x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 279 ...

Page 292: ...Claws 4 2x 3 1 4 1x 1x 2 6 Remove the Front Fan 1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Left Cover Upper 4 Remove the Left Cover Assembly Rear 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 280 ...

Page 293: ...wn the boss 1 with a screwdriver and remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan 3 1 Boss 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 3 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Be sure to insert the A part of the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 into the guide 1 in the cover to install the fan 1 2 A Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 281 ...

Page 294: ...1 Remove the grounding 1 1 Screw 2 1 Harness Guide 3 1x 1 2 3 1x 2 Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 from the guide 2 Screws 2 5 Claws 3 4 Bosses 4 Old Type 5x 4 4 3 1 3 3 3 New Type 5x 4 4 3 1 2x 3 3 3 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 282 ...

Page 295: ...Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 1 Connector 2 1x 1 2 NOTE When installing the PCB be sure to fit it with the 4 claws on the bottom side NOTE Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position Removing the Motor Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 283 ...

Page 296: ... 1 4 1 3 2 1 1x 3x Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Motor Fan Removing the Motor Fan on page 283 Procedure 1 Remove the Wire Saddles 1 10 Wire Saddles 1 10x 1 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 284 ...

Page 297: ...w Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 2 4 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 2 Screws 2 1 2 2x Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Motor Fan Removing the Motor Fan on page 283 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 285 ...

Page 298: ...Supply Unit on page 284 Procedure 1 Remove the 2 Support Plates 1 and the grounding 2 3 Screws 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 1 3 4 2 3 3x 1x 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 from the guide Old Type 8 Claws 2 6 Bosses 3 8x 3 2 2 3 1 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 286 ...

Page 299: ...Charging High Voltage Wire Spring Guide Y Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB The following is an errata for compatibility No Uninstallable Yes Installable Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Old New Charging High Voltage Wire Spring Guide Y Old Yes Yes New Yes Yes Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Old New Charging High Voltage Wire Spring Guide M Old Yes Yes New No Yes 4 Parts Replacement and C...

Page 300: ...Distinguishing Between the New Old Types New Old Y M Y M 1 2 1 2 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 2 and remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 2 Connectors 2 1 2 2 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 288 ...

Page 301: ... correct position Removing the Control Panel Preparation 1 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right Door on page 277 Procedure 1 Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 289 ...

Page 302: ...et Side Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 3 Remove the Control Panel Hinge Cover Right 1 1 Claw 2 1 Boss 3 2 Protrusions 4 1x 1 4 3 2 4 Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover Small 1 4 Claws 2 4x 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 290 ...

Page 303: ...ses 3 1x 2 3 1 6 Remove the Control Panel Hinge Inner Cover 1 5 Protrusions 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation When installing the Control Panel Hinge Inner Cover be sure to follow the order shown below 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 291 ...

Page 304: ... 1 2 8 Remove the Control Panel 1 5 Screws 2 1 Hinge Shaft 3 1 Boss 4 4x 4 3 2 1 2 2 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation When installing the Hinge Shaft be sure to align the shape of the shaft hole with that of the shaft s leading edge 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 292 ...

Page 305: ...he Control Panel Procedure 1 Pull out the Control Panel Pen 1 and remove the Control Panel Lower Cover 2 4 Screws 3 1 Claw 4 4x 3 3 4 2 1 2 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB 1 1 Reuse Band 2 1 Wire Saddle 3 2 Connectors 4 2 Flat Cables 5 4 Screws 6 4x 2x 4x 5 1 5 6 4 6 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 293 ...

Page 306: ...ly open the Right Door 3 Remove the Control Panel 4 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB Procedure 1 Remove the Control Panel Stay 1 9 Screws 2 9x 1 2 2 2 2 Remove the Touch Panel LCD Unit 1 and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 2 6 Bosses 3 2 Claws 4 1 Hook 5 3 4 1 3 3 4 2 5 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 294 ...

Page 307: ...e the Copy Board Glass 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 3 Move the Belt 1 to move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off part 3 of the Reader Scanner Unit 2 2 1 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 295 ...

Page 308: ...Loosen the 1 Screw 1 Remove the Belt 3 from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner 2 1x 2 3 1 6 Pick up the Reader Scanner Unit 1 and remove the Belt 2 CAUTION Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable 1 may be damaged 1 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 296 ...

Page 309: ... the sheet of half folded A4 paper 1 1 2 8 Remove the Flat Cable 2 and the Protection Sheet 3 from the Reader Scanner Unit 1 Connector 1 1 Flat Cable 2 1 Protection Sheet 3 4 Guides A 4x 1x A 1 2 3 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 297 ...

Page 310: ...NSTALL 1 RDSHDPOS 3 Adjust the stream reading position Lv COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL 1 STRD POS 4 Perform white level adjustment 1 Set A3 or LDR paper in the copyboard glass CAUTION If white level is adjusted in the small width paper there is possibility that it will not adjust 2 Execute white level adjustment at copyboard reading Lv COPIER FUNCTION CCD 1 DF WLVL1 3 Remove the paper from copyboard gl...

Page 311: ...ng the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit 2 Remove the Glass Retainer Right 1 and then remove the Copy Board Glass 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 299 ...

Page 312: ...e cut off part 3 of the Reader Scanner Unit 2 2 1 3 4 Put a sheet of half folded A4 paper 1 under the Reader Scanner Unit 1 5 Loosen the 1 Screw 1 Remove the Belt 3 from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner 2 1x 2 3 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 300 ...

Page 313: ...er Unit 1 and remove the Belt 2 CAUTION Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable 1 may be damaged 1 2 1 7 Put the Reader Scanner Unit 2 on the sheet of half folded A4 paper 1 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 301 ...

Page 314: ...oks 4 2x 3 1x 4 2 2 1 9 Clean 4 mirrors 1 with silbon paper soaked with alcohol Clean the mirrors from one end to the another in one direction NOTE The rearmost mirror 2 is dustproof mirror Cleaning is not needed 1 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 302 ...

Page 315: ...ving the HDD Preparation 1 Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below 2 Printing the set registered data COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT In case the backup fails print it out or export it to a USB 3 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 5 Remove the Controller Cover Removing the Controller Cover on page 303 4 Parts Replacement...

Page 316: ...ting Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Button information in Quick Menu Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Restrict Quick Menu Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu Yes 9 Button settings on the top of the screen Yes 9 Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Yes 9 Other settings for Main Menu Yes 9 Box settings Mail Box Settings Box Name PIN Time Until File Auto De lete Print Files Upon Storing from Pr...

Page 317: ...ing SST or USB memory The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function 9 For detail about the backup method with DCM refer to Backup Restoration in imageRUNNER ADVANCE Vx x System Service Manual 10 The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB When a HDD is rep...

Page 318: ...DD Removing the HDD on page 303 Procedure CAUTION Do not transfer the following parts to another host machine whose serial number is different The host machine does not start up normally and may become unrecoverable in some cases Main Controller PCB with the Memory PCB unremoved FLASH PCB TPM PCB Memory PCB 1 Free the harness from the Main Controller PCB 1 9 Connectors 2 11 when a fax is installed...

Page 319: ... is installed 2x 1 3 Free the harness 1 3 when a fax is installed from the hole 2 and free the Flexible Cable 3 from the guide 4 1 3 4 2 2 1x 4 Remove the Flexible Cable guide 1 1 Bosses 2 1 Hooks 3 1 3 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 307 ...

Page 320: ...the power Backup the Service Mode data Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP After ACTIVE is displayed for approx 2 minutes OK is displayed If necessary output the servise mode setting values by P PRINT before execution Lv 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 3 Remove the Cover Rear Lower Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB 1 26 Connectors 2 6 Screws 3 6x 26x 2 3 3 1...

Page 321: ...ement due to the damage to the DC Controller PCB enter the values of service mode items recorded on the service label or P PRINT 3 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch Removing the Fax Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 2 Remove the Controller Cover Removing the Controller Cover on page 303 Procedure 1 Disconnect the connector when the 2 line Fax is installed 1x 2 Remove the 2 Wi...

Page 322: ...3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 2x 4 Remove the Fax Unit 2 Hooks 1 2 Bosses 2 2 Screws 2x 2 2 Removing the Controller Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 310 ...

Page 323: ...ove the 4 pins 1 from the fan The pins are protruding into the edge of the fan Hooking your finger onto the protrusion part a will help to remove them easily 3 Disconnect the connector 1 of the fan and remove the fan 3 while firmly holding down the heat sink 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 311 ...

Page 324: ...the Fixation Pins to the fan pay attention to the orientation of the pins so that the ends of the pins open to the right and left as shown in the picture 1 and figure A below If the pins are inserted such that the ends of the pins open upward and downward as shown in figure B the ends of the pins will not open sufficiently when installing the fan onto the heat sink and the fan will not be installe...

Page 325: ...3 Align the fan with the Fixation Pins inserted with the hole of the heat sink 4 After pushing in the Fixation Pins insert the Locking Pin 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 313 ...

Page 326: ...CAUTION Check that the color of the seal at the center is black 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 314 ...

Page 327: ...edure 1 Grasp and lift up the handle 1 to release the protrusion 2 and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit 3 to the position in the following figure 1 Clamp 4 2 Screws 5 2x 1 2 3 4 5 1x 2 Turn over the Protection Sheet 1 and free the harness 2 from the Harness Guide 3 1 Connector 4 3 Disconnect the Flexible Cable 5 1x 2x 1 4 3 5 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 315 ...

Page 328: ... 2 CAUTION Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment Actions after Replacement 1 Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 If the degree of color displacement differs between the center and the edge execute copy ratio correction and distortion correction as needed Cleaning the Dustproof Glass 1 Open the Front Door 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 316 ...

Page 329: ...tproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 into the hole 2 and clean the glass by moving it back and forth 2 to 3 times in the A part 1 1 2 2 A CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Do not insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool upside down 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 317 ...

Page 330: ...rum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state 1 Open the Front Door 2 Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 1 1 3 Pinch the light blue A part and pull out the Drum Unit 1 CAUTION Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum do not touch the surface Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper otherwise it will be exposed to light 1 A 4 Parts R...

Page 331: ...moving the Drum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state 1 Remove the Drum Unit Removing the Drum Unit on page 318 Procedure 1 Remove the screw 1 1 Screw 1 1 1x 2 Pull out the Developing Unit 1 to the position in the figure below disconnect the connector 2 and hook it on the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover 3 1 Connector 2 1x 1 2 2 3 1x 4 Parts Replacement and C...

Page 332: ...m the supply mouth 2 Before installing the Developing Unit orient the Front Cover 1 upwards and shake the unit strongly up and down approx 10 times with its angle unchanged 2 㹶10 60 1 2 CAUTION If the Developing Unit is installed with toner uneven in the container the screw may be broken and E020 E021 may occur 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 320 ...

Page 333: ...or may get stuck when inserting the Developing Unit 5 Insert the Developing Unit up to the position in the figure below CAUTION Take care to prevent the connector of the Developing Unit from getting caught 6 Disconnect the connector 1 from the groove in the cover and connect it to the Developing Unit 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 321 ...

Page 334: ...g Unit up to the position where it is to be secured with a screw CAUTION If you insert it abruptly toner may scatter on the rear side inside the machine when the shutter opens Old Type New Type 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 322 ...

Page 335: ...SET Y M C K When this is performed each of the initialization operations is performed and the parts counters are cleared NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 DV UNT Y M C K 2 Check COPIER ADJUST DENS D Y M C K LVL and write down on the service label of the Front Door 3 Check COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT Y M C K and write down on the service label of the Front Door 4 Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Fu...

Page 336: ... at Replacement Replacing the Waste Toner Container after the preparation warning has been displayed clears the parts counter automatically Parts Counter COPIER COUNETR DRBL 1 WST TNR Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 Open the Right Door 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 324 ...

Page 337: ...ction of the arrow to remove the sheet 1 2 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2TR ROLL It is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared Removing the ITB Unit Preparation CAUTION If the ITB Unit is replaced in sleep mode or the power is turned OFF in sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller is not disengaged and the ITB Unit can not be pulled out Set standby mode to replace the ITB Un...

Page 338: ...he left side 1 A 2 2 Switch your grip to the handle B on the left and right and pull out the ITB Unit 1 B 1 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation 1 Install the unit while the Primary Transfer Roller is completely disengaged Check that the Disengagement Cam is located at the position shown in the figure on the right Left Side 2 Check that the shutter of the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth is closed 4 P...

Page 339: ... same time After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch After Removing the ITB Unit Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 1 Open the shutter 1 and clean the Patch Sensor 2 using the blower 3 After cleaning check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface of the sensor If the soiling cannot be removed perform step 2 2 While pressing the...

Page 340: ...ding of the sensor window Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner Cleaning the Light Guide 1 Clean the upper surface 1 of the Light Guide of each color Drum Unit using the blower 2 1 2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 325 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 328 ...

Page 341: ... 2 Bosses 2 1 2 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 T CLN BD It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the ITB Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade on page 328 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 329 ...

Page 342: ...on Guide 1 to loosen the tension of the ITB and secure the guide using the clasp 2 3 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 2 Stand the ITB Unit and secure it by using the ITB Cleaning Blade 1 as a base 1 Boss 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 330 ...

Page 343: ...3 by rotating it while lifting up the boss 2 1 Screw 1 1 Boss 2 1x 1 3 2 CAUTION When installing removing the Left Handle align the holes 1 and 2 in a straight line 1 2 Be careful not to lose the Parallel Pin 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 331 ...

Page 344: ...Tension Roller Retainer 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 NOTE When installing the Tension Roller Retainer do so in the order of 1 spring 2 rib and 3 Shaft Hole 5 Remove the ITB Tension Roller 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 332 ...

Page 345: ...that the rib of the ITB is not placed on the Tension Roller NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Y M C BK Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB on page 329 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3...

Page 346: ...ner Member 1 1 3 Remove the Primary Transfer Roller 1 1 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLK Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLC It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Patch Sensor Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 334 ...

Page 347: ...ode SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment During Patch Sensor Unit Replacement 1 Enter the value shown on the label included in the package COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA F COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA R 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment 3 After executing auto gradation adjustment see the alarm log to check that 10 0006 10 0007 has not occurred When an alarm occurs perform a remedy according to the ins...

Page 348: ...wer Supply Cooling Fan on page 280 Procedure 1 Lift up the A part of the lever to release the claw 1 and remove the Waste Toner Drive Assembly 2 1 Claw 1 1 Connector 3 2 Screws 4 2 Hooks 5 2x 1x 1x 3 4 2 A 1 5 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 WT DR U Removing the Registration Drive Unit Duplex Merging Motor Registration Motor Preparation 1 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Removing the Re...

Page 349: ...lade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 1x 1 2 2 Remove the Duplex Merging Motor 1 and the Registration Motor 2 2 Connectors 3 4 Screws 4 4x 2x 3 3 2 1 4 4 3 Remove the Registration Drive Unit 1 2 Screws 2 3 Claws 3 1 2x 2x 2 3 1x 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 337 ...

Page 350: ...emoving the Main Drive Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Pull out the Drum Unit by approx 30 mm 3 Pull out the Developing Unit by approx 30 mm 30mm 4 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 5 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 338 ...

Page 351: ...t Plate 3 Screws 1 27 Connectors 2 10 Wire Saddles 3 3x 10x 27x 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 Free the harness 1 of the Low voltage Power Supply Assembly and disconnect the connector 2 of the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 Wire Saddles 3 2x 1x 3 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 339 ...

Page 352: ...moving the Main Drive Unit and Points to Note Rear Plate Hook Controller Box Low Voltage Power Suppy Unit Main Drive Unit 1 Release the hook of the Main Drive Unit from the Rear Plate 2 Pull out the Main Drive Unit approx 10 mm horizontally 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 340 ...

Page 353: ...ully and horizontally otherwise the coupling may be caught on the Rear Plate and be damaged Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre exposure LED Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Main Controller PCB Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 306 2 Removing the Main Drive Unit Removing the Main Drive Unit on page 338 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 341 ...

Page 354: ...4 Pre exposure LEDs 1 1 Claw 2 4x 2 1 3 Remove the guide 1 of the Pre exposure LED 1 1 Adjustment after Replacement The following procedure can also be performed in Service Mode SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment at replacement of the Pre exposure LED Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 342 ...

Page 355: ...ervice label on the Front Door Remove the Bottle Drive Unit YM CBk Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 325 2 Pull out the Cassette 1 3 Open the Waste Toner Assembly Cover 4 Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 5 Remove the Toner Bottle 6 Remove the Left Cover Upper 7 Remove the First Delivery Tray CAUTION Be sure to place a sheet of paper during the work to prevent the dr...

Page 356: ...r Bottle Mount Y and C only 1 Connector 2 2 Wire Saddles 3 2x 1x 2 1 1 3 2 Depending on the model perform one of the following operation Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Upper 1 Y M C 2 Hooks 2 1 Boss 3 2 3 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 344 ...

Page 357: ... Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Upper 1 BK 2 Hooks 2 1 Boss 3 1 2 2 3 3 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Lower 1 2 Claws 2 2 Hooks 3 2 2 1 3 2 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 345 ...

Page 358: ... of the following operation Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit YM 5 Connectors 1 1 Wire Saddles 2 1x 5x 1 1 2 Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit CK 4 Connectors 1 4x 1 1 5 Remove the link 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 346 ...

Page 359: ...6 Remove the Bottle Drive Unit 1 2 Bosses 2 5 Hooks 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 347 ...

Page 360: ...ion Sheet before installing the unit 2 Be sure to pull out the slider 1 forward 1 Push the Lock Lever inside 2 Pull out the slider 3 Pull the Lock Lever 1 1 3 After the slider has been moved check that the 2 bosses are stopped at the correct position When the slider is not in the correct position E025 0 10 0 68 may be detected 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 348 ...

Page 361: ... waste toner has overflowed onto the Intermediate Guide this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating the Waste Toner Feed Motor M17 COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR 14 1 Remove the Left Cover Upper 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 349 ...

Page 362: ... Procedure 1 Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder 1 1 Claw 2 2 Hooks 3 3 Bosses 4 3 4 3 2 4 1 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 350 ...

Page 363: ...the Waste Toner Gear Holder onto the edge B of the plate to secure it Be sure to check that boss a and C three places in total have not come off Be sure to check that there is no gap between the Waste Toner Gear Holder and the mounting parts 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 351 ...

Page 364: ...the Front Door 6 Remove the Toner Bottle 7 Remove the Drum Unit 8 Remove the Developing Unit 9 Remove the Left Cover Upper 10 Remove the First Delivery Tray 11 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount 12 Remove the Intermediate Guide 13 Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder 14 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 15 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 16 Remove the Main Drive Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 352 ...

Page 365: ... Procedure 1 Remove the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 1 1 Claw 2 for each 1 2 1x 2 Remove the First Delivery Tray 1 2 Protrusions 2 for each 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 353 ...

Page 366: ...ve the Drum Rail Units 1 and free the harness 2 from the guide only for Bk 1 Screw 3 for each 1 Screw 4 for each 4x 4x 1x 2 1 1 3 4 4 Remove the Developing Stay Units 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 354 ...

Page 367: ...e Guide this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating the Waste Toner Feed Motor M17 COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR 14 1 Fully open the Right Door 2 Remove the ITB Unit 3 Remove the Front Door 4 Remove the Toner Bottle 5 Remove the Drum Unit Y 6 Remove the Developing Unit Y 7 Remove the Left Cover Upper 8 Remove the First Delivery Tray 9 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount 4 Part...

Page 368: ...ver 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x 2 Release the 2 links 1 of the Bottle Motor 1 1 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation When installing the links of the Bottle Motor be sure to pinch the Lock Arm 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 356 ...

Page 369: ...per Cover 1 2 Screws 2 1 Connector 3 3 Wire Saddles 4 2x 1 2 3x 1x 3 4 4 Remove the Front Inner Lower Cover 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 5 Remove the Intermediate Guide 1 1 Screw 2 1 Hook 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 357 ...

Page 370: ...eared when a new Fixing Unit is detected When a fixing error E001 E002 E003 occurs be sure to turn ON the power after closing the Right Door When FX UNIT is cleared FX LW RL FX UP FR FX LW BS are also cleared at the same time Removing the Fixing Film Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 358 Procedure 1 Remove the Fixing Disengagement Gear 1 1 Claw 2 1 2 1x 4 P...

Page 371: ...he Fixing Left Cover 1 2 Claws 2 1 2 2x NOTE If the claw of the Fixing Left Cover is damaged 1 can be secured by tightening the screws 1x 3 Rotate the Fixing Unit 180 degrees 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 359 ...

Page 372: ...ver 1 2 Claws 2 CAUTION Since there are connectors connected inside do not remove them abruptly 2 1 2x 5 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 3 Connectors 1 1 1 3x 6 Rotate the Fixing Unit 90 degrees 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 360 ...

Page 373: ...d right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 1 8 Remove the 2 springs 1 from the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 9 Return the Fixing Pressure Lever 1 1 10 Open the Fixing Lower Cover 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 361 ...

Page 374: ...right and left with the rail 3 1 2 2 3 3 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP FR It is also cleared at the same time when FX UNIT is cleared Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 358 2 Remove the Fixing Film Unit Removing the Fixing Film Unit on page 358 4 Parts Replacement and Cleani...

Page 375: ... Procedure 1 Open the guide 1 1 2 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller 1 1 3 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 363 ...

Page 376: ... the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 358 3 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 325 4 Remove the Right Upper Rear Cover 5 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Removing the Second Delivery Unit on page 372 6 Remove the First Delivery Unit Removing the First Delivery Unit on page 371 Procedure 1 Remove the Air Flow Duct 1 2 Claws 2 2x 2 1 2 Remove the Fixing Drive Assembly 1 3 S...

Page 377: ...the cassette each paper source Procedure 1 Move the Pickup Guide Holder 1 1 2 Pull out the Pickup Roller 2 Feed Roller 3 Separation Roller 4 while holding down the claw 1 3 Claws 1 1 3 2 4 1x NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Cx PU RL Cx FD RL Cx SP RL Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 Cx PU RL Cx FD RL Cx SP RL Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller 1 Open the Multi purpo...

Page 378: ... 1 1 Claw 2 2 Bosses 3 3 1 2 1x 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1 and the Feed Roller 2 1 2 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide 1 1 Hook 2 2 Claws 3 on the host machine side 2 1 3 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 366 ...

Page 379: ...U RL M SP RL M FD RL M PU RL M SP RL M FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared CAUTION Points to Note at Installation 1 Because a jam may occur when the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller is not inserted properly be sure to insert it all the way to the correct position 2 When installing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover be sure to do so after aligning 1 with the bo...

Page 380: ...e Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 7 Open the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray 5 2 4 3 Procedure 1 Remove the Wire Fixation Member 1 1 Claw 2 3 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 368 ...

Page 381: ...ay Pickup Tray 4 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 1 Clamp 4 2x 1x 1 2 3 4 5 Fully open the Right Door 6 Remove the Link Gear 1 1 Screw 2 2 Bosses 3 CAUTION Be sure to perform work while supporting the Right Door with your thigh and taking care to prevent it from falling 1x 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 369 ...

Page 382: ... pulling the Lever Assembly Rear 2 toward the outside at the position A of the Stopper Rail and opening the door 1 2 A A NOTE Bend the A part when removing the Lever Assembly The figure shows the Stopper Rail on the rear side Pull the Lever Assembly Front Rear toward the outside at the position B B B A 8 Remove the Right Door 1 2 Bosses 2 1 2 2 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 R DOOR REG R...

Page 383: ...r Rear Upper 3 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 358 4 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Removing the Second Delivery Unit on page 372 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 2 3 1 4 2x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 371 ...

Page 384: ...AUTION Points to Note at Removing If you pull the right side of the First Delivery Unit out too far the 2 bosses may be damaged Removing the Second Delivery Unit Preparation 1 Open the Right Door 2 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 372 ...

Page 385: ...ure 1 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit slightly 4 Screws 1 Wire Saddle 4x 1x 2 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit slightly and disconnect the connector 1 Connector 1 1x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 373 ...

Page 386: ...bosses may be damaged Removing the Third Delivery Unit 1 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right Door on page 277 2 Remove the Third Delivery Unit 3 Bosses 3 Protrusions 5 Screws 5x Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Right Door Unit Removing the Right Door Unit on page 368 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 374 ...

Page 387: ...e Right Door Link Left 1 and Right Door Link Right 2 1 2 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 1 Claw 2 1 Hook 3 2 3 1 1x 3 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 2 3 1 1x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 375 ...

Page 388: ...Right Door Shaft Support Block 1 on the left side 1 A 2 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 2 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 376 ...

Page 389: ...p Unit Option Preparation 1 Pull out all of the cassettes 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 7 Remove the Cassette Cover Right Front 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 377 ...

Page 390: ...e Cover Right Rear and remove the Cassette Right Door 9 Remove the Cassette Right Cover Lower 7 9 8 6 3 5 4 Procedure 1 Release the connector 1 of the Harness Guide 2 Connectors 1 2x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 378 ...

Page 391: ...ve the Pickup Unit 1 4 Screws 2 1 1 2 2 4x Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Removing the Registration Guide Unit on page 384 Procedure 1 Remove the Guide Plate 1 2 Screws 2 Use a stubby screwdriver 2x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 379 ...

Page 392: ...p the left bushing 1 and remove the Shaft Spacer 2 CAUTION Use caution as the Shaft Spacer drops easily at this time 1 2 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Be sure to push the Shaft Spacer from above all the way down 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 380 ...

Page 393: ...so that the side with the marking in the following figure is on the right NOTE Be sure to replace the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller at the same time as the Registration Roller This is because the speed control varies as the roller wears Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 VP FD RL VP FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 381 ...

Page 394: ...n the Right Door on page 277 Procedure 1 Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Retainer 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Release the protrusion by bending the hook 1 on the Secondary Transfer Guide 1 3 Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit 2 Protrusion 2 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 382 ...

Page 395: ...4 Remove the gear 1 1 Claw 2 1x 2 1 5 Remove the E ring 1 1 6 Remove the Registration Roller 1 1 7 Remove the Spacer Right 1 and Spacer Left 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 383 ...

Page 396: ...ION Be sure that the rib A is inside the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit 3 3 4 4 2 1 4 Fit the protrusion 2 while bending the guide 1 on the rear side 2 1 NOTE Be sure to replace the Registration Roller at the same time as the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller This is because the Speed Control varies as the roller wears Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 REG RL REG RL is also cleared at the same time...

Page 397: ...ove the right side of the Registration Guide Unit 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the hole 1 and then release the claw 3 from the Registration Guide Unit 2 1 Claw 3 2 1 1x 3 3 Release the 2 protrusions and pull out the Registration Guide Unit 2 CAUTION Be careful of the connector on the back 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 385 ...

Page 398: ...4 Disconnect the connector 1 1 Connector 1 1 Wire Saddle 2 Old Type 1x 1 New Type 1x 1 2 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 386 ...

Page 399: ...Adjustment 5 Pickup Feed System 388 Document Exposure System 391 Actions after Replacement 393 ...

Page 400: ...OPIER TEST PG PG PICK each paper source CAUTION When image is printed by 2 sided print 1st side is printed up side of the paper and 2nd side is printed down side of the paper When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side check the margin in up side of the paper on the rear side from the feed direction CAUTION If the margin is not within the standard values Adjust the image position of each...

Page 401: ... Adjustment Plate is moved toward the left on the machine by 1 tooth the left edge margin is increased by 0 5mm Scale Teeth 5 Tighten the fixation screw NOTE A step may occur between the cassette when the adjustment plate is moved Loosen the 2 screws to adjust the step on both side of the cassette front cover 5 Adjustment 389 ...

Page 402: ...e COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG THCK 1 2 speed front side COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP2 1 2 speed back side Leading edge margin is increased or decreased 0 1mm by 1 setting value 2 Left Edge COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1 C2 C3 C4 MF front side COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1RE C2RE C3RE C4RE MFRE back side Left edge margin is increased or decreased 0 1mm by 1 setting value 3 When the service setting ...

Page 403: ...the restoration on the following service mode LV 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES NOTE When changing the service mode setting values it is recommended to back them up in the above service mode Performing backup makes the work easier when replacing the Scanner Unit etc When Clearing RAM Data of Reader CAUTION Be sure to perform the following work before clearing RAM data Output P PRINT COPIER FUNC...

Page 404: ...COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Y COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR G COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR B COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 RG COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 GB COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P Y COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P M COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P C COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P K FEEDER ADJUST LA SPEED FEEDER ADJUST DOCST 5...

Page 405: ...nstallation Operations are not guaranteed if it is used without formatting Backup target data and backup method Backup target data Backup method User Service DCM Power OFF excluding DCM Address Book Yes 1 Yes 9 Forwarding Settings Yes 1 Yes 9 Settings Registration Preferences Excluding the paper type management set tings Yes 9 Yes 10 Adjustment Maintenance Yes 9 Yes 10 Function Settings Excluding ...

Page 406: ...te UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import or Export 2 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings User Management Authentication Management User Management 3 Remote UI Quick Menu Export 4 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Back Up Restore 5 Remote UI Service Management Service 6 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Setting...

Page 407: ...PRINT before execution COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 After the above execution is completed turn OFF the main power supply After Replacement 1 Restore of the Service Mode data on the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK is displayed about 2 minutes later Restoration is complete 2 If uploading of backup data fails before replacement ...

Page 408: ...COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K 2 Write the following service setting values on the service label in the front cover according the replaced colour of the developing unit COPIER ADJUST DENS D Y LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D M LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D C LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D K LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT Y COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT M COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT C COPIER ADJ...

Page 409: ...ction Copy Ratio Correction Horizontal Scanning Direction 1 Clear the offset value of copy ratio correction on the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT H 2 Output PG for adjustment on the following service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE 62 COPIER TEST PG PG PICK Select the paper source where A4 or LTR size paper or larger is loaded 3 Check the chart and enter the value in the least part o...

Page 410: ...low the steps shown below to adjust the white level 1 Place a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 size paper on the Copyboard Glass CAUTION When executing the white level adjustment using a paper with smaller width adjustment may not be executed properly If low whiteness paper is used the adjustment may result in failure 2 Adjust the white level at copyboard reading by executing the following service mode COPI...

Page 411: ... the Copyboard Glass CAUTION When executing the white level adjustment using a paper with smaller width adjustment may not be executed properly If low whiteness paper is used the adjustment may result in failure 2 Adjust the white level at copyboard reading by executing the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 3 Remove the paper from the Copyboard Glass and place it on the ADF Docum...

Page 412: ...tial Check 401 Test Print 402 Troubleshooting Items 407 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs 415 Startup System Failure Diagnosis 417 Controller Self Diagnosis 425 Debug Log 431 Version Upgrade 448 Backup Restore 495 ...

Page 413: ...ower plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manu...

Page 414: ...da tions Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 7 For R D 8 Half tone Patch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scan ning direc tion Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 11 For R D 12 MCYBk 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 13 For R D 14 Full color 16 grada tion Yes Yes...

Page 415: ...lure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image Failure of Drum Unit Uneven density at front rear Check that uneven density does not appear at front rear Failure of Drum Unit Full half tone TYPE 5 This test print is for mainl...

Page 416: ...nit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on laser light path Uneven pitch Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image Failure of Drum Unit Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image Dirt on Dustproof Glass Deterioration of ITB Grid TYPE 6 This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement right angle accuracy and straight line accurac...

Page 417: ...otosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path 64 gradations TYPE 12 This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations de...

Page 418: ...ethod Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Gray balance Check that density is even in each color on gray scale area Failure of Drum Unit 6 Troubleshooting 406 ...

Page 419: ...ccurs If the front side is lower paper on the front side proceeds less smoothly than the rear side and the image on the front side shrinks a If the front side is higher paper on the front side proceeds more smoothly than the rear side and the image on the front side enlarges b Execute fixing alignment adjustment so that the height at the front and the height at the rear of the Fixing Unit become t...

Page 420: ...e power was turned OFF while in sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller will not be disengaged therefore the machine needs to be returned to standby state before removing the Drum Unit Bk Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum do not touch the surface Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper otherwise it will be exposed to light 5 Remove the Control Panel Lower...

Page 421: ...6 Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover 1 1 Screw 2 7 Pull out the Cassette 1 1 and open the Cassette Side Cover 2 2 Screws 3 8 Disconnect the connector 1 of the Front Fan 6 Troubleshooting 409 ...

Page 422: ...9 Open the Front Fan 1 and disconnect the connector 2 2 Screws 3 1 Claw 4 10 Remove the Front Fan 1 6 Troubleshooting 410 ...

Page 423: ...te A and the Adjustment Plate B downward for the same divisions of the scale a REAR FRONT REAR FRONT b c 12 Install the parts in the reverse order from step 10 to step 1 13 Output the image where the symptom occurred and check that the symptom does not occur If the symptom persists check for other factors Troubleshooting by Forcible Stop of Paper Feed Function Overview Forcibly stop the paper at a...

Page 424: ...ion is executed the setting to forcibly stop the paper becomes disabled Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position Handle it carefully How to Use Use this function from SITUATION mode Service mode top screen SITUATION Troubleshooting Forcible Stop of Paper Feed The following service modes can be operated from this SITUATION mode COPIER TEST P STOP PRINTER COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPI...

Page 425: ...n 1 Yes Yes Yes 99 Pre fixing 1st side when checking the image Yes 1 Paper is stopped when a duplex job is executed paper is stopped after being reversed 2 Paper may not stop depending on the setting of delivery outlet 3 Way Unit D1 should be installed 3 The size of paper should be the one that allows to pass the short path e g A4 LTR etc 4 The size of paper should be the one that can pass the lon...

Page 426: ... 2 Open the Right Cover Unit 3 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the hole A 4 Turn the flat blade screwdriver until the pressure of the ITB is released A 5 Remove the Drum Unit 6 Remove the ITB Unit 6 Troubleshooting 414 ...

Page 427: ...ghting status of LEDs on the PCB Location of LEDs SATA_FLASH Main Controller PCB LED7 LED1 LED14 Preconditions Check whether the connectors are securely connected LEDs are not lit when the contact is poor Power on is not possible When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit check the connection of cables such as UI Cable 6 Troubleshooting 415 ...

Page 428: ...operation Yes No 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 Replace the FLASH PCB LED7 lights up LED14 lights up Replace the Main Controller PCB No Yes 1 Error in the connector on the Main Controller PCB 2 Replace the Main Controller PCB No 3 Replace the power supply of the machine Yes Checking the startup of firmware Checking the Non all night Power Supply 12V Checking the power supply on the Main Contr...

Page 429: ...flow diagram Has only the backlight gone off Can you hear the operation sound of the Hard Key Is 12V supplied to C1005 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Start Assumed failure location 1 Control Panel CPU PCB 2 Main Controller PCB1 3 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4 Control Panel Unit No Yes Yes Assumed failure location 1 Control Panel Unit 2 12V Connector of the Control Panel 3 Main Controller PCB1...

Page 430: ...when the power of the host machine is turned ON identify the location of the failure according to the flow Flow for narrowing down troubles If the Control Panel LED is ON the All night Power Supply 3 3V is being supplied If the Control Panel LED is not ON it can be suspected that a failure has occurred in the signal path of the Main Power Supply Switch or to the Low voltage Power Supply PCB itself...

Page 431: ... Replace the harness Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes No No Does the host machine start warm up rotation No 1 Is the Control Panel 3 3V LED ON 2 Whether 3 3V can be checked in the Low voltage Power Supply PCB 4 Whether 12V can be checked in the Low voltage Power Supply PCB 4 Whether 12V can be checked in the Main Controller PCB 3 Is the Main Controller 12V LED ON 3 Whether 3 3V can be checked in t...

Page 432: ...Item Check item Location 2 TYPE1 FB601 3 31v TYPE1 RJ90 3 31v 3 Main Controller PCB 3 3V CP226 3 31v 4 Main Controller PCB 12V LED is ON 12V 6 Troubleshooting 420 ...

Page 433: ...tem Check item Location 5 Is 12 V detected at the connector J313 of the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB 11 95v 6 Is 12 V detected at the connector J20 of the Main Controller PCB 11 95v 6 Troubleshooting 421 ...

Page 434: ...Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB Replace the Touch Panel Replace the Numeric Keypad PCB Yes Yes No No Yes No Press the Volume key several times to start work with the operation sound heard Yes No Yes No Replace the Low voltage Power Supply PCB 1 Is 12V supplied to the Control Panel 3 Is the Control Panel displayed after replacing the Control Panel CPU PCB Is the operation sound heard when the Touc...

Page 435: ...low of Startup System Failure Diagnosis Status Check If startup does not complete properly with only the Control Panel bar displayed identify the location of the failure according to the flow Description The workflow of the Controller system failure diagnosis to be executed when only the Control Panel bar is displayed Check item Startup Method 1 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing ...

Page 436: ...re Download by 2 8 startup Replace the SATA Flash Replace the Main Controller Unit Flow D Flow for identifying the cause of failure in the Main Controller PCB and Flash PCB Status Check The Control Panel may not be turned ON even if there is a failure in the Flash PCB therefore identify the PCB causing the failure before replacing the Main Controller PCB Check Item 1 Turn OFF the power 2 Remove th...

Page 437: ...ool PCBs Units Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB TPM PCB FLASH PCB Memory PCB HDD Overview Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine and stored in the locations shown below Reader HDD Option All night Non all night Power Supply DC Controler PCB Main Controller PCB Operation panel Flash PCB Controller system failure diagnosis tool Controller System Error Diagnosis...

Page 438: ...NG The errorlocations are identified according to the ControllerSystem Error Diagnosis Table Basic Check Items Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB and Control Panel is disconnected Check if the Connection An All night Power Supply Check if the Connection Cable from Main Controller PCB is disconnected Change AC Driver PCB if n...

Page 439: ...l the following screen appears on the Control Panel Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx 3 minutes The result is displayed on the Control Panel When the diagnosis result is normal When an error is detected by diagnosis Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result In detailed information the name of the test where an error was detected is indicated How to view the error re...

Page 440: ...l ler PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB SN 9 LANC FLASH Check failure of LANC SPI on the Main Controller PCB Main Control ler PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB SN 10 RTC CHECK Check failure of RTC on the Main Con troller PCB Main Control ler PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB SN 11 TPM Check failure of the TPM PCB on the Main Controller PCB TPM PCB is not installed in products for China...

Page 441: ...he HDD If the result is CAUTION recommend the backup of user data Refer to S M A R T Check See below S M A R T Check S M A R T Check Explanation Countermeasure 05 Reallcated Sectors Count 0000000000000 Count of reallocated sectors If the result is not 0000000000000 recommend the backup of user data C5 Current Pending Sector Count 0000000000000 Current count of unstable sectors waiting for remappin...

Page 442: ... error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names this diagnosis tool will not boot When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB the following judgment results are displayed Standard PCB NG Optional PCB OK However no is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs 6 Troubleshooting 430 ...

Page 443: ...settings the settings need to be changed according to the trouble that occurs and the situation Types of Debug Logs Types of Debug Logs Description Sublogs Manual logs Logs collected in each module and controller are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed Logs of the Main Controller RCON and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs in total Automatic logs Log...

Page 444: ...example a fax transmission error occurred If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error collect the key operation logs Key operation logs are not recorded by default therefore the function needs to be enabled In order to save key operation logs configure the setting of the following Settings Registration menu to ON enabled Management Settings Device Management Sto...

Page 445: ...s company to issue a license CAUTION When collecting network packet logs using this function be sure to obtain user s permission in advance by explaining about it CAUTION In the case of a heavy load network environment some of the packets may be left uncollected 6 Troubleshooting 433 ...

Page 446: ...r just finished occurring See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case B of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case C of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case A of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs Does the problem repeat restart Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked Network packet logs need to be collected Key operatio...

Page 447: ... Logs on page 440 3 Save and collect reports by referring to Saving and Collecting Reports on page 441 4 Collect debug logs by referring to Collection of Log on page 442 Case D Problem when execut ing a job Example Printing is not per formed etc Not necessary 1 Execute log saving while the problem is occurring by referring to Sav ing of Manual Logs Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs on pag...

Page 448: ...peration 4 Output of reports Output reports necessary for escalation 5 Collecting log files Start the machine in download mode and save collect the log files to a USB device or a PC CAUTION In the case of analysis using Sublog the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog Symptom that has occurred from service technician s viewpoint as far as possible Date and time of the...

Page 449: ...icense in the following menu to enable network packet capture Settings Registration Management Settings License Other Register License NOTE To register a license it is necessary to request the Support Dept of the sales company to issue a license 2 Enable the setting ON in the following menu Settings Registration Preferences Network Store Network Packet Log 3 Set 1 in the following service mode Lv ...

Page 450: ... save conditions with LOG TRIG is indicated below 1 Press LOG TRIG enter the value for the conditions you want to set and press OK ACTIVE flashes in the display column and the log settings in the machine are changed 2 When OK is displayed in the display column the work is complete If the processing fails NG is displayed It is not necessary to restart the device NOTE A value between 0 and 99999 can...

Page 451: ...capture remains HDDFULL If the capture is stopped while the CAPSTATE is HDDFULL the CAPSTATE of the capture remains STOP Setting the encryption function 1 To enable this function set 2 in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER TEST NET CAP ENCDATA 0 Encrypted when data is extracted factory default setting 1 Not encrypted when data is extracted 2 When data is extracted a ciphertext file and a plain...

Page 452: ...udes the machine s MAC address in the packet header is captured Saving of Manual Logs Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs Follow the procedure shown below to save debug logs manual logs network packet logs and key operation logs that require manual operation to the save area of the host machine 1 Reproduce the symptom and hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx 10 seconds ...

Page 453: ... completion of analysis of the network trouble be sure to disable the network capture function It is therefore necessary to disable and then transfer the license but it is not necessary to transfer the LMS license after that Saving and Collecting Reports Follow the procedure shown below to save reports to the HDD in the host machine and collect them using a USB device 1 Execute the following servi...

Page 454: ...e Menu USB v25 12 v25 12 1 SUBLOG Download 4 ServicePrint Download 5 NetCap Download C Return to Menu Press 1 key to download Sublog Press 5 to download network packet log 5 The files to be downloaded and the number of files are displayed Check the following items and press 0 on the Numeric Keypad Whether the manual log that was saved at the time of reproduction of the symptom is displayed under E...

Page 455: ...101 102 20170322 0848 16 ZZZ00000 2512 clog bin 102 102 20170322 0803 33 ZZZ00000 2512 clog bin Sub log full Download OK Please press any keys Do not turn OFF the power without Saving to a PC with SST installed Follow the procedure shown below to save collect Sublogs to a PC using SST If a USB device is used to save collect Sublogs this work is not necessary 1 Connect a PC with SST installed to th...

Page 456: ...ick at Log to expand the tree and check that there are continuous logs date_model number_clog bin 5 Select the data to upload and click Start Select the check box on the left of Log and click the Start button It is not necessary to select MeapBack bin and SramImg bin because they are not necessary for analysis 6 Enter a file name arbitrary and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC 6 Tro...

Page 457: ...SB device Root folder of the USB device In case of SST PC s C ServData model name serial number folder Image file name Type Example of the file name Continuous logs 20161013_1733 36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog bin Identification indicating that it is a continuous log Firmware Version Serial Number Date when files are stored 6 Troubleshooting 445 ...

Page 458: ...mber YYYYMMDD_HH MM CAUTION The event log and manual log are collected as one file shown below 20161013_19 34 ZZZ99999 V1406_SAFE bin Firmware Version Serial Number YYYYMMDD_HH MM CAUTION LOGLIST TXT contains a list of downloaded files and you can see the list to check whether the necessary files have been downloaded If it is opened using Windows standard Notepad it cannot be displayed correctly d...

Page 459: ...changes all the settings related to debug logs back to the default settings at the time of shipment Be sure to perform when returning the device to the customer after completion of trouble investigation Operations required Execute this service mode when resetting the settings related to debug logs during investigation of log collection and perform the operation again However note that the log file...

Page 460: ... How to upgrade versions Registered name of prod uct Name of sys tem software SST USB mem ory CDS Host Machine SafeCont iAC 3330 SYSTEM Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura StdCont Language Module LANGUAGE Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Printer Controller DCON Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura FAX Board Boot Program G3CCB Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura FAX Board Main Program G3CCM Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Staple Saddle Finisher U1 Fin...

Page 461: ...tarted the downloaded system software is written to the system area and applied When the system software is successfully applied the machine is automatically restarted using the downloaded system software Upgrading with SST For details on the procedure refer to Version Upgrade via SST on page 450 Upgrading with a USB Device For details on the procedure refer to Version Upgrade using USB Memory Sto...

Page 462: ...ia SST Overview Overview of Upgrading Using SST Software software Flash PCB Flash PCB iR Device iR Device 1 Obtain system software 1 Obtain system software 3 Download system software storage area storage area PC for service PC for service 2 Register to SST 2 Register to SST Flash PCB storage area storage area orag storage area storage storage area 4 Write to system area 4 Write to system area Syst...

Page 463: ...backup data Basically use the assist mode to download the system software of this machine Registering to SST Register the system software stored in the system file storage folder to SST NOTE When the system software has been compressed decompress the compression file and then register the file to SST 1 Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the f...

Page 464: ...work address as follows IP address 172 16 1 160 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway arbitrary CAUTION Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings Alternatively use the cross cable to connect to this machine 1 Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed CAUTION Disconnect USB memory storage devices if connected This machine disables the c...

Page 465: ...e is turned ON and connect the PC and this machine with the cross cable Upgrading the System Software Assist mode 1 Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service mode to enter download mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 3 Start SST and click the Start Assist Mode button If newer combination of the system software is stored in SST...

Page 466: ...for SYSTEM is selected There is no choice but to select Overwrite all versions when the checkbox for SYSTEM is not selected 5 Click the Next button 6 Click the OK button 7 Enter service mode to check the version of the system software NOTE When an error occurs during version upgrade the machine is normally started with the previous version of the system software the version before the upgrade Afte...

Page 467: ... supports the selected system NOTE Download is confirmed in any of the following 2 modes Downloading of the difference only Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download the downgraded versions Overwrite all versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade all versions of the system software are downloaded without the confirmation message Skip the existing versions and confirm whet...

Page 468: ... device 3 Register to USB System Software System Software iR Device iR Device 1 Obtain system software 1 Obtain system software 4 Download system software storage area storage area PC for service PC for service 2 Register to SST 2 Register to SST Flash PCB Flash PCB storage area storage area orag storage area storage storage area 5 Write to system area 5 Write to system area System System System S...

Page 469: ...e is automatically backed up internally However the difference in processing time is only a few seconds or tens of seconds and the effect is not significant To avoid risks in the event of a trouble it is recommended to use the normal mode backup is performed Register the system software Register the system software registered in SST to the USB memory storage device For information on registering t...

Page 470: ...y storage device is inserted 4 Select the Series 5 Select the version to register After selecting the version click Confirm button NOTE Only one version can be registered at once In addition a single system software can be registered 6 Troubleshooting 458 ...

Page 471: ... is successfully registered to the USB memory storage device click the OK button Connection CAUTION This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory storage device Therefore SST and a USB memory device cannot be used at the same time 1 Remove the network cable if any network cable is connected to this machine 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service m...

Page 472: ... if the machine fails to recognize a USB memory storage device within the time period In such a case use another USB memory storage device CAUTION Note when the power is turned OFF To prevent unnecessary error do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software although the machine can be normally started using the previous version thanks to the recovery mechanism when a...

Page 473: ...r du ligiciel Ne mettez pas le peripherique hors tension Software wird aktualisiert Schalten Sie das Gerat nicht AUS ソフトウェアの更新中です 電源を切らないでください Writing to the system software area on the FLASH PCB is started once download is completed When writing to the Dcon ACC1 CCM or CCB if there is an option is completed the machine is automatically restarted After writing of SafeCont is completed the machine ...

Page 474: ...ed on a module basis Press the key on the control panel 0 Overwrite any key other than 0 Not to overwrite When download is completed this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the system software area in the FLASH PCB When writing to the Dcon ACC1 CCM or CCB if there is an option is completed the machine is automatically restarted After writing of SafeCont is completed the machine...

Page 475: ...nel and select removal of memory media device and then remove the USB memory storage device 5 Enter service mode to check the version 7 Update Backupless mode Versions are upgraded without performing automatic backup of the existing system software 1 Remove the network cable if any network cable is connected to this machine 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service mode to ente...

Page 476: ...tware area on the FLASH PCB is started once download is completed When writing to the Dcon ACC1 CCM or CCB if there is an option is completed the machine is automatically restarted After writing of SafeCont is completed the machine is automatically restarted again 7 When the main menu is displayed press the removal key at the bottom right on the touch panel and select removal of memory media devic...

Page 477: ...es Company s HQ on page 202 Network Set tings on page 203 Enabling UGW Link on page 206 Enabling Update Firmware Button on page 206 Enabling Manual Update Button of Remote UI on page 207 UGW linked Download and Up date Yes Yes Yes UGW linked Download Yes Yes Yes Manual Download and Update Yes Yes Manual Download and Update via Local UI Yes Yes Yes Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Y...

Page 478: ...completing firmware update UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW linked download STEP 2 Update using Updater STEP 1 Scheduling via UGW Scheduling via UGW The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW See UGW linked Download in Operation Manual of Content Delivery System for Firmware Distribution for detai...

Page 479: ...arted when the firmware is successfully applied 6 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW the E mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update Manual Download and Update On site Update from Service Mode The figure below shows the operational flow of Manual Download and Update 6 Troubleshooting 467 ...

Page 480: ...e mode menu 2 Press Update Firmware button 3 Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways To update to the official edition press Confirm Applicable Firmware button and go to Step 6 To update to the individual response edition press Special Firmware and go to Step 5 6 Troubleshooting 468 ...

Page 481: ...al Languages If there are any additional languages they are displayed More than 1 language can be selected and it is possible to add another language when upgrading the firmware Up to 8 languages can be added including Japanese and English The languages already registered in the device are always selected and SST is used to delete an unnecessary language from the device Release Note If any release...

Page 482: ...nly delivery disabled only OFF can be selected in Updated Module Only On Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded Off The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded E mail E mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here Enter the E mail address of the service technician in charge Enter 1 byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 cha...

Page 483: ... are set to Now and Manual respectively Confirm the firmware and press OK button Now STEP 1 is successfully completed When Distribution Time is set to Set Time in Distribution Setting Confirm the distribution schedule and press OK button Now STEP 1 is successfully completed Update using Updater The firmware downloaded to this device can be updated using Updater functions When Timing to Apply is se...

Page 484: ...ply Firmware button 4 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 5 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 6 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware 6 Troubleshooting 472 ...

Page 485: ...ton 3 Press Apply Firmware button 4 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 5 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 6 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 6 Troubleshooting 473 ...

Page 486: ...nts of the distribution schedule and press Yes button 5 Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press OK button Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 6 Troubleshooting 474 ...

Page 487: ... deletion and press OK button Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation No 1 Symptom I can t find the firmware to be updated using Updater Cause The setting of Sales Company s HQ is wrong Action Use the following service mode to set the correct region COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS CTL 6 Troubleshooting 475 ...

Page 488: ... rewriting 2 Via SST format the hard disk of BOOT Dev only 3 Via SST install the firmware in the device No 4 Symptom Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule Cause Other firmware distribution schedule is set Since only 1 distribution schedule is held the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule Action Once the schedule is overri...

Page 489: ...em Management Operations of Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more details of changing Log Level 4 If the value of CDS MEAP or CDS FIRM was changed in the service mode return to the original value and then restart the device to enable this setting Obtaining the log files is completed Error Messages Error messages displayed in Updater Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are...

Page 490: ...f this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 6 Failed to retrieve information of special firmware Check the retrieval ID and pass word Acquisition of appli cable firmware in formation No information exists about firmware for spe cial firmware retrieval ID or Password is inva lid Enter the correct firmware ID or Password appli cable to the firmware information If it recurs obtain the ...

Page 491: ...work cable was disconnected during data download in the communication test Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Trouble shooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company The file server stopped during data download in the commu...

Page 492: ...le shooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Server stopped at the time of sending notice of version information Check the network environment of the device and re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Trouble shooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales c...

Page 493: ...f it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Trouble shooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update er ror dialogue At the update start an internal error occurred Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upg...

Page 494: ...s manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update main screen Automatic update main screen Updated version was different from the or dered version Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Trouble shooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company After the update...

Page 495: ...ivery Time Delivery Firmware Label Delivery Firmware version Error Code xxx UGW linkage Up date Firmware screen The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery server was be fore current time 15 or more min had passed Do the delivery setting from UGW again If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs on page 477 under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Trouble shooting ...

Page 496: ...this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 17 The Delivery Server URL is in correct In setting with the deliver server URL The specified deliver server URL is wrong Enter the right URL https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif Error Code Explanation on Error Codes and Their Remedies The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the dev...

Page 497: ...code list Local UI Error Message dialogue Remedy by Error Code Remedy to Be Taken When an Error Code Starting with 81 Is Displayed The remedy for an error code whose first two digits are 81 is shown below 1 Refer to List of Error Codes Starting with 81 and try the remedy 2 If the symptom is not resolved by performing the remedy shown in the error code list report it to the support department of th...

Page 498: ...t department of the sales company Attach information on the time of oc currence and the serial number of the device Tam ura Tam ura 81 0002 In the case of 81 0002 except follows In a string type of a data entry item digit number and or character type is are set against the regulations is displayed in the fol lowing cases Tam ura Tam ura 81040002 The number of digits of the registration ID or pass ...

Page 499: ...information an install set was release to the market but the market release was stopped during the delivery Contact the support department of the sales company Attach information on the time of oc currence and the serial number of the device Tam ura 81 1003 No mail template file exists Tam ura 81 1004 The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in delivery information Tam ura...

Page 500: ...act the support department of the sales company Attach information on the time of oc currence and the serial number of the device Tam ura 81 1012 Device is Not applicable to CDS Firmware distribution It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed Register the device as a CDS device Tam ura 81 1013 When the specified distribution time was within the time frame of CDS distribution stop ...

Page 501: ... The CDS server in the Cause of error column includes CDS distribution servers and CDS file servers Error Code Description Remedy Cause of error CDS server UP DATER Network 8X 1001 Processing exclusively Start the operation again after ter minating other Updater operations being executed simultaneously Tam ura 1002 Stopped Restart the device and start the operation again Tam ura 1101 Failed to pro...

Page 502: ...nd update log of the device Tam ura 4102 Processing SOAP communication now Tam ura 4103 The function type is not matched Tam ura 4104 An invalid SOAP response error Check the network environment When this problem recurs contact the support department of the sales company Tam ura 4105 No network cable connection device side Check the network environment If it occurs again contact the sup port depar...

Page 503: ...he device and start the operation again Tam ura 5201 Invalid HTTP request Contact the support department of the sales company Attach the Sublog and update log of the device Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura 5202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the device check for any problem in the DNS server and start the operation again Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura 5203 Failed to find the serv...

Page 504: ... net protocol https But it excludes iR ADV C5200 9200 7200 series Tam ura Tam ura 8X Socket communication 6101 Failed to connect the eRDS Contact the support department of the sales company Attach the Sublog and update log of the device Tam ura Tam ura 6102 No response from eRDS Tam ura Tam ura 6103 No notice of start from the eRDS Tam ura Tam ura 6104 Error of socket reading Tam ura Tam ura 6105 ...

Page 505: ...nt is not correct 81 F011 Version information not registered Version information corresponding to the specified se rial number has not been registered 81 F012 Distribution time out Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time from the start of the distribution 81 F013 Unable to judge the necessity of distribution Version information from a device has not been registered ...

Page 506: ...notification main screen Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the device was not registered in CDS Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was res...

Page 507: ...inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting Formatting the Hard Disk with SST on page 502 Formatting FLASH PCB or Hard Disk by Download Mode on page 504 Backup target data Settings Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Except for Printer Custom Settings Forwarding Settings Set Destination Except for Address List M...

Page 508: ...B COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES Restore Backup of DC Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Restore Data is stored in Flash ROM Settings Enter download mode to back up restore the machine using SST The following IP address is automatically assigned to the machine when it enters download mode IP address 172 16 1...

Page 509: ...l of the machine from Model List and select Single Check the network settings and click Start 5 Click Upload Data button NOTE If communication cannot be established with the machine there may be a problem with the network IP address settings Start the command prompt on the PC and execute the ipconfig command As the network settings of the PC are displayed check the IP address settings Fix any prob...

Page 510: ...o not select Sublog bin 7 Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary Click Save button 8 Click OK button Restoration Procedure Restore data backed up from the machine with SST to the machine CAUTION The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack 1 Use the cross cable to connect the machine ...

Page 511: ... List and select Single Check the network settings and click Start 5 Click Download Data button 6 Select the data to be downloaded and click Start button 7 When the data are successfully downloaded click OK button 8 Restart the machine 6 Troubleshooting 499 ...

Page 512: ...for backing up restoring the machine using a USB device are indicated below Contains system software for the machine Formatted with the FAT file system Has 1 GB or more of free space recommended Backup Restoration Procedure 1 Remove the network cable if any network cable is connected to this machine 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service mode to enter download mode COPIER FU...

Page 513: ...ss the numeric key for the desired menu Backup Restore Menu USB 1 SRAM Backup 2 SRAM Restore 3 MEAP Backup 4 MEAP Restore C Return to Menu Do not turn OFF power without executing the shutdown sequence No Menu Contents 1 SRAM Backup When replacing the Main Controller PCB this function is used to temporarily save the data stored in SRAMFLASH to the Flash PCB 2 Restore This function is used to restor...

Page 514: ...lowing cases When installing the hard disk from other machine installed When the hard disk seems to be faulty and it is highly possible to solve the problem by formatting Executing Format ALL on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the hard disk as well as the MEAP application therefore be sure to gain agreement with the user NOTE For normal version update there is no need to format the...

Page 515: ...Check the network settings and click Start NOTE The hard disk cannot be formatted in assist mode 4 Click Format hard disk button 5 Click Execute Format button Hard disk is formatted at next startup The startup will take longer than normal for the hard disk format 6 Troubleshooting 503 ...

Page 516: ...entire hard disk or FLASH PCB Executing format on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the hard disk or FLASH PCB as well as the MEAP application caution therefore be sure to gain agreement with the user NOTE The MEAP application data can be restored to the hard disk later by backing up MeapBackup bin before formatting For details on the procedure refer to Backup Restoration using SST o...

Page 517: ...Format To initialize the entire hard disk Formatting is necessary when replacing a service part hard disk Note that recovery is not available by HD CLEAR in service mode 2 Fash Format To initialize the entire FLASH PCB After executing format of the FLASH PCB the user data in the FLASH PCB is initialized and the machine is started Download of system software is not necessary because the system soft...

Page 518: ...Error Jam Alarm 7 Overview 507 Error Code 511 Jam Code 617 Alarm Code 624 ...

Page 519: ... Thus an error code is described as EXXX using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual e g E012 E000012 Location code Error code jam code and alarm code include the location information Location information is displayed as 2 digit numbers as follows In the error and jam display screen the L row corresponds to the location code Device JAM ERR ALARM imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3300 00 Main Controller 00 Printer...

Page 520: ... jam without pickup operation at SEND Inbox etc 00 Cassette 1 01 Cassette 2 02 Cassette 3 03 Cassette 4 04 Multi purpose Tray 05 Duplex F0 Pickup size When a jam occurs a paper size is displayed The row displaying SIZE on the jam screen refers to the paper size 7 Error Jam Alarm 508 ...

Page 521: ...I C0 ISOC0 B OFI Bolivia OFICIO I C1 ISOC1 E OFI Ecuador OFICIO I C2 ISOC2 M OFI Mexico OFICIO I C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea LEGAL I C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government LEGAL I C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government LETTER I C6 ISOC6 IND LGL India LEGAL I C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10 I SRA3 SRA3 DL DL J B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2 J B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3 J B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4 J B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5 J B4 JISB4 E K2 Kakugata 2 J B...

Page 522: ...n accordance with the configuration of the options of the host machine and requests from the user When clearing MN CON while any login application other than User Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error c...

Page 523: ...ed Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0002 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Front high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Front in the Fixing Unit detected 295 deg C or higher for 0 2 sec or longer Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Fixing Thermistor 1 DC Controller PCB ...

Page 524: ...kup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0004 05 Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor in the Fixing Unit detected 287 deg C or higher for 0 2 sec or longer Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Fixing Thermistor 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J121 to Fix...

Page 525: ... COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 001 0006 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear in the Fixing Unit detected 297 deg C or higher for 0 2 sec or longer Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Fixing Thermistor 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J121 t...

Page 526: ...PIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 002 0002 05 Fixing Main Thermistor open circuit detection error Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Fi...

Page 527: ... COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 002 0004 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear open circuit detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PC...

Page 528: ...R LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 003 0005 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Front low temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Front detected a temperature of 80 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer from start of PI control until completion of the last rotation the Fixing Heater was turned OFF Remedy Related parts Harnesse...

Page 529: ...cable connector and parts 2 After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM...

Page 530: ...ata may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 009 0000 05 Fixing pressure timeout error Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect ON status within 10 sec after the start of pressure application operation for fixing Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Fixing ...

Page 531: ...ITB Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed for 0 5 consecutive sec although 0 8 sec have passed from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bk Drum_ITB Motor M02 J1054 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J129 Unit of replacement CABLE MAIN DRIVE Main Drive Unit Unit of replacement MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY Bk Drum_...

Page 532: ...data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 010 0003 05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection Description There was no FG signal input for 0 3 sec from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bk Drum_ITB Motor M02 J1054 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J129 U...

Page 533: ...on COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 012 0002 05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained for 0 5 consecutive sec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit The detection timing varies depending on the paper feed conditions Remedy Related parts Harness between the CL Drum Motor ...

Page 534: ...rotected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 013 0001 05 Waste Toner Feed Motor error Detection Description After rotation speed of the Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected when the motor was driven it was detected that the speed was not at the specified speed for 2 consecutive sec Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB...

Page 535: ...der while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Fixing Unit is pushed into the host machine so the handle is locked 2 Remove the Fixing Unit and rotate the Cam Gear and the Pressure Roller Gear by hand to visually check that there is no bent or missing teeth or abnormal abrasion edge of the gear is no longer tooth shaped 3 Replace the Fixing Unit 4 Check the harness between the DC...

Page 536: ...owing in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Fixing Unit is pushed into the host machine so the handle is locked 2 Remove the Fixing Unit and rotate the Cam Gear and the Pressure Roller Gear by hand to visually check that there is no bent or missing teeth or abnormal abrasion edge of the gear is no longer tooth shaped 3 Replace the Fixing Unit 4 Check the harness...

Page 537: ...ess than 1 ohm conduction state 1 Replace the Fixing Motor 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB b If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher non conduction state replace the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL...

Page 538: ...igh Voltage PCB UN03 J501 and J502 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J114 and J112 Unit of replacement CABLE 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB Registration Patch Sensor Unit Unit of replacement REGISTRATION SENSOR ASSEMBLY Developing Unit Y Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY Y Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 Unit of replacement 2ND TRANSFER H V PCB ASSEMBLY DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement D...

Page 539: ...igh Voltage PCB UN03 J501 and J502 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J114 and J112 Unit of replacement CABLE 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB Registration Patch Sensor Unit Unit of replacement REGISTRATION SENSOR ASSEMBLY Developing Unit M Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY M Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 Unit of replacement 2ND TRANSFER H V PCB ASSEMBLY DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement D...

Page 540: ...Voltage PCB UN03 J501 and J502 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J114 and J112 Unit of replacement CABLE 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB Registration Patch Sensor Unit Unit of replacement REGISTRATION SENSOR ASSEMBLY Developing Unit C Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY C Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 Unit of replacement 2ND TRANSFER H V PCB ASSEMBLY DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CO...

Page 541: ...ON SYSTEM DSRAMRES 020 04C8 05 Error in take up of Sealing Member Bk Detection Description The patch output value SigR failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit Bk Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the Registration Patch Sensor Unit to the DC Controller PCB 1 Registration Patch Sensor Unit to Relay Connector 16P Unit of replacement REGISTRATION SENSOR ASSEMBLY 2 Relay...

Page 542: ...UNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 021 0002 05 Developing Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained for 0 5 consecutive sec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Developing Motor Remedy Related parts Harness between the Developing Motor M10 J1190 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J129 Un...

Page 543: ...Relay Connector 4P Unit of replacement CABLE RELAY 3 Relay Connector 4P to DC Controller PCB UN04 J128 Unit of replacement CABLE SENSOR Developing Unit M Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY M DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Main Drive Unit Unit of replacement MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference B...

Page 544: ... DC Controller PCB UN04 J127 Unit of replacement CABLE TONER BOTTLE Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor Y PS26 J1059 and DC Controller PCB UN04 J127 Unit of replacement CABLE TONER BOTTLE Toner Supply Sensor Y Bottle Drive Unit YM Unit of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY Y M DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable co...

Page 545: ...it of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY Y M DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM ...

Page 546: ...it of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY C K DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM ...

Page 547: ...it of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY C K DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM ...

Page 548: ...tch Sensor Unit Front is soiled If it is soiled clean it with lint free paper moistened with water 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration...

Page 549: ... the Main Drive Unit did not detect home position within the specified period of time Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J131 to Relay Connector 3P Unit of replacement CABLE MAIN DRIVE 2 Relay Connector 3P to Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor PS33 J1189 Unit of replacement CABLE SEN...

Page 550: ...the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 100 0001 05 BD error Detection Description The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Y M Laser Driver PC UN08 J203 and the C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 J801 Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Flat Cable between t...

Page 551: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 110 0002 05 Scanner Motor error Detection Description The speed was not locked by BD control within 5 5 sec after startup of the Scanner Motor Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Y M Laser Driver PC UN08 J203 and the C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 J801 Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Flat Cable between the...

Page 552: ...t Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J19 and the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J201 Unit of replacement FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLY Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J111 and the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J202 Unit of replacement CABLE CASSETTE SIZE Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMB...

Page 553: ...nd the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J202 Unit of replacement CABLE CASSETTE SIZE Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J114 and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 J501 Unit of replacement CABLE 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 Unit of replacement 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB ASS Y DC Controller PCB UN...

Page 554: ...J202 Unit of replacement CABLE CASSETTE SIZE Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J114 and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 J501 Unit of replacement CABLE 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 Unit of replacement 2ND TRNSFR H V PCB ASS Y DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROL...

Page 555: ...fter the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 197 1002 05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the CPU of the DC Controller PCB and KONA2 ASIC in the DC Controller PCB was detected Remedy Remedy Replace the DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacem...

Page 556: ...ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 197 5001 05 Serial communication error Detect...

Page 557: ... sequence K Detection Description Error for collecting log Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error 202 0001 04 Scanner HP error Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation Remedy Related parts Harness between the Scann...

Page 558: ...eplacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Low Voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 Unit of replacement POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When an error is detected conduction of 24 V is stopped At power check check if 24 V is conducted by repeating power cycling of the machine 1 Measure the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J313 pin 3 usin...

Page 559: ...CB J1411 pin 2 using a tester 8 When 24 V is not output to the ADF Driver PCB J1411 pin 2 check the harnesses from the Main Controller PCB to the ADF Driver PCB 9 When 24 V is output to the ADF Driver PCB J1411 pin 2 replace the ADF Driver PCB 240 0000 00 Controller communication error Detection Description A sequence error with the controller occurred Remedy Related parts Flexible Cable between t...

Page 560: ...Connector 2P Unit of replacement CABLE ADF POWER CONNECTING 2 Relay Connector 2P to ADF Driver PCB PCB1 J1411 Scanner Unit Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Low Voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 Unit of replacement POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY ADF Driver PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and par...

Page 561: ...ble between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J33 and the Scanner Unit Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Scanner Unit Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 280 0001 04 Scanner Unit communication error Detection Description Communication between the Main Controller ...

Page 562: ...in Controller PCB UN05 J33 and the Scanner Unit Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Scanner Unit Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Stream Reading Glass Unit of replacement GLASS READER Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 315 0007 00 Image processing device error Detection Description JBIG e...

Page 563: ... of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY 315 0100 00 Image processing device error Detection Description PRIO overrun Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY 315 0500 00 Device timeout error Detection Description An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader could not be detected for 30 sec or longer Remedy Re...

Page 564: ... was detected Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY 315 0540 00 Device timeout error Detection Description An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader could not be detected for 30 sec or longer Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY 315 0541 00 Image...

Page 565: ...ales company 355 0002 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 355 0003 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 355 0004 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company 400 0002 04 Communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Main Contro...

Page 566: ...r Pass Controller PCB and the Finisher Controller PCB 2 Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB 3 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 503 0002 02 Communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher ...

Page 567: ...01 02 a Assist Motor error b Rear End Assist Guide HP error Detection Description a The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor operation started b The rear end assist guide does not come off the Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor although the Rear End Assist Guide Motor has been driven for 3 seconds Remedy a INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and con...

Page 568: ...ddle Motor Remedy INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor Paper Fold HP Sensor PS8 Paddle Motor M10 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher...

Page 569: ...ntroller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 530 8002 02 a Rear Alignment Motor error b Front Aligning Plate HP error Detection Description a The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Rear Alignment Motor operation started b The Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor does not detect the front aligning plate al...

Page 570: ...er Controller PCB PCB1 b STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit Stapler Unit including the Staple Motor M111 and the Staple HP Sensor PI50 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjus...

Page 571: ...1 02 Return Belt Motor error Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return Belt Motor operation started Remedy INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor Return Belt HP Sensor PS3...

Page 572: ...harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 537 8001 02 a Front Alignment Motor error b Rear Aligning Plate HP error Detection Description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation st...

Page 573: ... in the Service Manual 540 8001 02 a Tray Shift Motor error b Tray 1 timeout error Detection Description a The Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Tray Shift Motor operation started b The tray does not return to its home position although the Tray 1 Shift Motor has been driven for 25 seconds The tray does not move to the other area although the ...

Page 574: ...ller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Motor Tray 1 drive mechanism Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor PI114 Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB PCB4 Tray 1 Shift Motor M107 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Contro...

Page 575: ...s detected during the tray shift operation The tray reached the area that passed through Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 before the Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 detects the paper surface during the tray escape operation Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 Harnesses and connectors from the Fi...

Page 576: ...rts 577 0002 02 Paddle Motor error Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle Motor operation started The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor Remedy INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Fi...

Page 577: ...r HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Ejection Motor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Shutter Clutch Shutter drive mechanism Shutter HP Sensor PI113 Stack Ejection Motor M102 Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch CL102 Shutter...

Page 578: ...dle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Paper Folding HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Paper Folding Motor Paper folding roller drive mechanism Saddle Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI4 Saddle Paper Folding HP Sensor PI21 Saddle Paper Folding Motor M2 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB2 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cab...

Page 579: ...les or connectors or the parts 5F3 8001 02 Saddle Alignment Plate HP error Detection Description The Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor does not detect the alignment plate although the Saddle Alignment Motor has been driven for 500 pulses Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor Harnesse...

Page 580: ...dle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Stitcher Unit Front Stitcher Unit Rear including the Stitcher Motor Front M7 and the Stitcher HP Switch Front SW7 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB2 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts 5F5 8002 02 Stitcher Front HP error Detection Description The stitcher front does not come off the Stitcher HP Switch Front although...

Page 581: ...rresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts 5F6 8004 02 Paper Pushing Plate position error Detection Description The paper pushing plate does not come off the paper folding position although the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been driven for 0 1 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle...

Page 582: ...ror at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL HDD Unit of replacement HARD DISK DRIVE Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following ...

Page 583: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0211 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the...

Page 584: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0311 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacemen...

Page 585: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 3 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0411 00 HDD error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SA...

Page 586: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0511 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the...

Page 587: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0611 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the...

Page 588: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 an...

Page 589: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Uni...

Page 590: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 0911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of re...

Page 591: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 1011 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacemen...

Page 592: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 1111 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the update related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacem...

Page 593: ...ller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 12 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller Sys...

Page 594: ... replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL HDD Unit of replacement HARD DISK DRIVE Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 14 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4...

Page 595: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 1711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement C...

Page 596: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 1811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the ...

Page 597: ... SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB 602 1911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Un...

Page 598: ...e checking whether the error is cleared 1 Install a genuine HDD 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory 3 Reinstall the necessary application software 602 FF01 00 HDD error Detection Description An HDD error was detected at startup Unidentified When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may ...

Page 599: ...roller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is installed properly 2 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 3 Ent...

Page 600: ... it is installed properly 2 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list 4 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory 5 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 6 Replace the Main Controller PCB Refere...

Page 601: ... error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is installed properly 2 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list 4 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory 5 After replacing the Fl...

Page 602: ...ftware and restore the backup data once the error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is installed properly 2 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list 4 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format ...

Page 603: ...B Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 614 0511 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application related area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of r...

Page 604: ...B Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 614 0611 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the license related area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement M...

Page 605: ...B Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 614 0711 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value service mode etc storage area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB ...

Page 606: ...corded in the error log Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect and then connect the connectors of the Flash PCB UN61 and the Main Power Switch and check if there is any bent pin or cable disconnection 2 Format the system 2 1 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory ...

Page 607: ...at the system 2 1 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory 2 2 Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 614 9001 00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection Description Error in memory allocation invalid memory at startup W...

Page 608: ...sing a USB memory 2 2 Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 614 FF01 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Flash error Unidentified Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in th...

Page 609: ... encryption library Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is cleared 1 After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB memory turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list 3 Enter safe ...

Page 610: ...OLLER PCB ASSEMBLY 674 0020 07 Fax Board communication error Detection Description An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax Remedy Related parts Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J30 Unit of replacement CABLE SIGNAL Fax Board Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and part...

Page 611: ...fore replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES b INNER FINISHER G1 Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J182 to Relay Path U...

Page 612: ...ce Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES b INNER FINISHER G1 Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J182 to Relay P...

Page 613: ...ce Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES b INNER FINISHER G1 Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J182 to Relay P...

Page 614: ...ce Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES b INNER FINISHER G1 Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J182 to Relay P...

Page 615: ...ce Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES b INNER FINISHER G1 Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J182 to Relay P...

Page 616: ...ta may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES 719 0001 00 Coin vendor error Detection Description The coin vendor which was connected before turning OFF the main power was not connected at power on Remedy Related parts Cable between the charging management equipment and the host machine Remedy Perform the following i...

Page 617: ...artup it became unavailable in the middle of it Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the harness between the Card Reader and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J14 2 Replace the Card Reader Reference In the case of operating the device without the Card Reader which had been used execute COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR CARD after removing the Card Rea...

Page 618: ...CB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 732 0010 00 Scanner communication error Detection Description DDI S communication error Vsync detection error was detected Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J33 and the Scanner Unit Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Scanner Unit Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Main Controller P...

Page 619: ...Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 Turn ON the power and check if the initialization is executed at startup 2 1 If the initialization is not executed replace the DC Controller PCB 2 2 If the initialization is executed replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacemen...

Page 620: ...M DSRAMRES 746 0022 00 Image Analysis Board error Detection Description Wrong version of the Image Analysis Board was detected Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory 2 After replacing the Image Analysis ...

Page 621: ...ement TPM PCB ASSEMBLY 3 If the TPM key was backed up restore the key 3 1 Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key 3 2 Execute Settings Registration Log In Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings Restore TPM Key CAUTION Ask the customer to enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN when logging in 3 3 Enter the password set at backup operation 3 4 When the restoration completio...

Page 622: ... startup program was not found or the HDD could not be recognized Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J29 and J23 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL Flash PCB UN61 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD and turn ON the main po...

Page 623: ...was detected 2 consecutive times in 3 sec when the Front Fan was driven Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Front Fan 1 DC Controller PCB UN04 J133 to Relay Connector 9P Unit of replacement CABLE SENSOR 2 Relay Connector 9P to Front Fan FM01 J1260 Unit of replacement CABLE INTERLOCK SWITCH DC Controller PCB UN04 J133 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Front...

Page 624: ...PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRE...

Page 625: ...f the Main Controller PCB was abnormal Remedy Related parts Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared a If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again replace the Main Controller PCB b If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log ...

Page 626: ...og and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR R to 0 default it is handled as a jam instead of an error 996 0CA1 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer Continuous 0CA1 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 ...

Page 627: ...ug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence 996 0CAF 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Finisher Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Finisher Continuous 0CAF jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference B...

Page 628: ...96 0CF3 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer Continuous 0CF3 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence 996 0CF4 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Prin...

Page 629: ...n harness open circuit of harness soiling grease deterioration failure of a drive motor or soiling pa per dust deterioration failure of a drive roller Power on A power on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power on Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor paper dust paper lint Error avoid ance An error a...

Page 630: ...side of the screen and this area can be pushed This operation can be used to switch information on the screen Host machine Cassette Pedistal PS24 PS08 PS22 PS12 PS10 PS52 PS51 PS14 PS11 PS101 PS106 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 00 0101 Delay jam Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS08 00 0102 Delay jam Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor PS24 00 0103 Delay jam Cassette 3 Vertical Path Sensor...

Page 631: ...tical Path Sensor PS101 00 0A04 Power ON jam Cassette 4 Vertical Path Sensor PS106 00 0A06 Power ON jam Fixingt Delivery Sensor PS10 00 0A07 Power ON jam First Delivery Sensor PS14 00 0A08 Power ON jam Second delivery Reverse sensor PS51 00 0A09 Power ON jam Third delivery sensor PS52 00 0A0A Power ON jam Reverse Sensor PS12 00 0A0B Power ON jam Pre Registration Sensor PS22 00 0A0C Power ON jam Ar...

Page 632: ...e stop of pa per feed 1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door or turning OFF and then ON the power supply 2 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door or turning OFF and then ON the power supply If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above the error code is displayed DADF AQ1 SR1 SR2 SR3 SR6 SR5 SR8 SR7 SR9 SR12 SR10 SR11 SR13 SR15 SR14 SR1 SR2 SR3 SR5...

Page 633: ... closed sensor When paper is stopped tempora rily SR6 01 0095 Pickup Error Registration sensor Document set sensor SR1 SR5 01 0096 Jam upon entering limited functions mode 2 01 00A1 Power ON Registration sensor SR1 01 00A2 Power ON Read sensor SR2 01 00A3 Power ON Delivery reversal sensor SR3 1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door or turning OFF and then ON the power supply 2 Jam...

Page 634: ...rror 02 1C16 Retry Error 1 Paddle Motor error 02 1C30 Retry Error 1 Rear Alignment Motor error 02 1C32 Retry Error 1 Staple Motor error 02 1C35 Retry Error 1 Return Belt Motor error 02 1C37 Retry Error 1 Front Alignment Motor error 02 1C40 Retry Error 1 Tray Lifting Motor error 02 1C77 Retry Error 1 Paddle Motor error 02 1F01 Other jams Paper feed cancellation jam 02 1F32 Other jams Manual stack i...

Page 635: ... PI201 02 1306 Power ON Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202 02 1380 Power ON Saddle Delivery Sensor Saddle Vertical Path Paper Sensor addle No 1 Paper Sensor Saddle No 2 Paper Sensor Saddle No 3 Paper Sensor Saddle Inlet Sensor PI11 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI22 02 1405 Door Open Buffer Pass Open Closed Sensor PI203 02 1480 Door Open Upper Cover Sensor Front Cover Sensor Front Cover Switch PI101 PI102 MSW1...

Page 636: ...n the configuration of the Voice Board or a change in the configuration of the option HDD which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected Detection condition timing At the time of startup only Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power 01 0020 The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed A Operation B Cause C Remedy Due to a change in the configuration relat...

Page 637: ...r swing with the gear 3 4 Check the Cassette 1 Lifter Motor 3 5 Replace the DC Controller 04 0002 Cassette 2 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor Measures 1 While the Cassette 2 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 2 and check the operation sound of the motor When there is operation sound of the motor check if the Middl...

Page 638: ...r swing with the gear 3 4 Check the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor 3 5 Replace the DC Controller 04 0004 Cassette 4 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor Measures 1 While the Cassette 4 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 4 and check the operation sound of the motor When there is operation sound of the motor check if the Middl...

Page 639: ...peration is carried out 4 times Measures Check the Cassette 1 Pickup and Feed and Separation Rollers Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not 04 0012 Cassette 2 paper feed retry error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement Nothing in particular Cause The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times Measures Check the Cassette...

Page 640: ...justment quick needs to be executed Execute auto gradation adjustment quick every time one of the following steps is performed 1 Check and clean the sensor window of the Registration Sensor Unit 2 Check that the Registration Sensor Unit Shutter is properly installed and it is not damaged 3 Check the operation of the Shutter Solenoid 4 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller PCB and t...

Page 641: ...r Unit 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB At this time be sure to perform backup and restoration according to the steps to be taken before after replacing the DC Controller 10 0017 Toner Y prior delivery alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as the value of Toner level detect value has reached the value set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV CL 10 0018 ...

Page 642: ...0 LED PCB FM1 D865 LED_DRV_RELAY_CABLE FM1 D864 DCON_LED_DRV_CABLE FM1 D866 EXP_LED_CABLE 29 0201 Drum M pre exposure alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An error in pre exposure of the drum M was detected Detection condition timing Warm up rotation Detection condition When the difference in detection value is within the specified value when the pre exposure light intensity is changed Remedy 1 Visu...

Page 643: ...0 LED PCB FM1 D865 LED_DRV_RELAY_CABLE FM1 D864 DCON_LED_DRV_CABLE FM1 D866 EXP_LED_CABLE 29 0401 Drum K pre exposure alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An error in pre exposure of the drum K was detected Detection condition timing Warm up rotation Detection condition When the difference in detection value is within the specified value when the pre exposure light intensity is changed Remedy 1 Visu...

Page 644: ...he ITB Unit 6 Replace the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB 30 0027 A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for cyan A Operation B Cause C Remedy Remedy 1 Check the harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller PCB open circuit caught cable connector disconnection Replace the harness if ...

Page 645: ...imes of motor start up stop total length of power on time etc Continuously using the machine without taking any measures may lead to E602 Measures Back up the data stored in the HDD and restore the data after replacing the HDD 31 0009 FLASH failure prediction alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the S M A R T value of FLASH memory It indicates a physical error of the FLASH memory whic...

Page 646: ...ded the upper limit during color fine adjustment A Operation B Cause C Remedy 34 0036 The correction value C of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment A Operation B Cause C Remedy 34 0044 The correction value Bk of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjus...

Page 647: ...lacing Parts ITB button Counter was cleared 35 0013 Transfer Roller replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Pushed was a Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Initialize After Replacing Parts Secondary Transfer Outer Roller button Counter was cleared 35 0070 Drum Unit Y replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy The replacement of the Drum Unit was detected 35 0071 Dr...

Page 648: ... Roller replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy The counter of the Cassette 3 Feed Roller was cleared 35 0087 Cassette 3 Separation Roller replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy The counter of the Cassette 3 Separation Roller was cleared 35 0088 Cassette 4 Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy The counter of the Cassette 4 Pick...

Page 649: ...arm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as the value of COPIER COUNTER LF M DRM LF has reached the value set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV CL 40 0072 Drum Unit C prior delivery alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as the value of COPIER COUNTER LF C DRM LF has reached the value set in COPIER OPTI...

Page 650: ...ration is continued until a job is finished Recovery method Replenish with staples 61 0002 Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause The staple free staple unit is broken Operation Operation stops as jam After jam processing the paper is delivered without stapling until a job is finished Recovery method Replace the Staple free staple unit After performing the remedy wo...

Page 651: ...73 0017 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0018 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0019 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0020 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0021 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0022 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0023 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0024 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0025 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 652: ...6 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 76 0008 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 76 0009 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0006 System memory insufficient A Operation B Cause C Remedy PCL5 Change the mode o...

Page 653: ... the download resource turn OFF and then ON the power 80 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0010 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0011 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0015 Invalid BDL data A Operation B Cause C Remedy Use the latest version of the printer driver for the model 80 0016 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0018 ...

Page 654: ...tion B Cause C Remedy Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong select the appropriate PDL in Settings Registration Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 83 0021 Reception of I5577 unanalyzable data A Operation B Cause C Remedy Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong select the appropriate PDL in Settings Registration Function Settings Print...

Page 655: ...ify the print range correctly 84 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 84 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 84 0006 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 84 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 84 0008 XPS non support image error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Convert Jpeg XR in data into another format 84 0009 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 7 Error Jam Alarm 643 ...

Page 656: ...Service Mode 8 Overview 645 COPIER Service mode for copier 656 FEEDER ADF service mode 979 SORTER Service mode for delivery options 982 BOARD Option board setting mode 999 ...

Page 657: ...ble from service mode UPDATER The function to upgrade the version using CDS BACKUP The function to backup the service mode setting values RESTORE The function to restore the service mode setting values SITUATION The function to search service mode in accordance with the purpose Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window main items sub items and minor items can be displ...

Page 658: ... range etc Display Language Japanese English French Italy Germany Spanish Tradissional Chinese Korean Simple Chinese I O information enhancement On the COPIER I O the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used sensor motor fan etc makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part And the screen will also display the input output signal 8 Service Mode 646 ...

Page 659: ...ice classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical parts classification s mark name port number and 0 1 content will appear 3 If the i button is pressed the screen displaying the electrical parts array will appear Display of Error Code Alarm Code description The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code occurrence record screen ER...

Page 660: ...ransfer related Image related developing IMG DEV Developer related Image related laser latent image IMG LSR Laser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF image related Image related controller other general items IMG MCON MN CON image related and image related items other than those referred to above Image quality copy speed IMG SPD Power down sequence Cleaning CLEANING Cl...

Page 661: ...pear 1 Enter System Manager ID enter System PIN press OK button System Mangeger ID and System PIN can be set up in Settings Registration Management Settings User Management System Manager Information Settings System Manager ID System PIN 2 After entering the password for service technician Service mode COPIER Option FNC SW SM PSWD press OK button SM PSWD NOTE If Service Engineer s password is forg...

Page 662: ...t values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default Therefore when you made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field be sure to write down the changed values in the service label When there is no relevant field in the service label write down the values in a blank field Position to affix the service label No Items Position to affix 1 Reader setting values Back side the Front Cov...

Page 663: ... 652 USB flash drive Moving the service report file to a PC using SST on page 653 PC Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output Service Mode Content P PRINT Output of service mode setting value HIST PRT Output of jam and error history USER PRT Output of UI menu list D PRINT Output of service mode DISPLAY ENV PRT Inside temp hmdy fix roller temp log PJH P 1 Detail info of print job...

Page 664: ...n MISC P RPT2USB and then press OK 3 3 86 357 537 OK 537 86 NOTE If the downloaded file is opened as plain text the paragraphs are misaligned which makes it difficult to read the data When the file is dragged to WordPad an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases Moving the file in download mode Preparation USB memory device FAT32 format file system with no passwor...

Page 665: ...G 5HWXUQ WR 0DLQ 0HQX 5HVHW 6WDUW VKXWGRZQ VHTXHQFH KDV EHHQ VHOHFWHG HFXWH 2 1 Q RWKHU NH V NOTE If the downloaded file is opened as plain text the paragraphs are misaligned which makes it difficult to read the data When the file is dragged to WordPad an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases Moving the service report file to a PC using SST The following shows a...

Page 666: ...2 Select the model 1 and the type of system software 2 Single then check the network settings and click START 1 2 3 Click Upload Data 4 Select P PRINT RPT txt and click Start 8 Service Mode 654 ...

Page 667: ...o improve workability and searchability at the site This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site The following three points are made available depending on each situation 1 Display of related service mode when an adjustment is necessary 2 Display of causes and remedies 3 Display of related images D E F 8 Service Mode 655 ...

Page 668: ...ware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SORTER 1 Display of FIN CONT firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 NIB 1 Display of network software version Detail To display the version of the network software Use Case When upgrading the firmware...

Page 669: ...play Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG DA 2 Display of Danish language file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG EL 2 Display of Greek language file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG ES 1 Di...

Page 670: ... Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG RU 2 Display of Russian language file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG SL 2 Display of Slovenian language file ver Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG SV 2 Display ...

Page 671: ...n no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 FAX1 1 Display of 1 line FAX PCB ROM version Detail To display the ROM version of 1 line FAX PCB Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range ASCII character string 12 digits FAX2 3 4 1 Display of 2 line FAX PCB ROM version Detail To display th...

Page 672: ... Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY KO 2 Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version Detail To display the Korean language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY CS 2 Dspl of COPY appli Czech file version Detail To display the Czech language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmwa...

Page 673: ...nge 00 01 to 99 99 COPY RU 2 Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version Detail To display the Russian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY SL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Ad...

Page 674: ...ing the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY VN 2 Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY AR 2 Dspl of COPY appli Arabic file ver Detail To display the Arabic language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When up...

Page 675: ... Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND TW 2 Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND KO 2 Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version Detail To display the Korean language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmw...

Page 676: ...ge 00 01 to 99 99 SEND PT 2 Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver Detail To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND RU 2 Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version Detail To display the Russian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display A...

Page 677: ...A UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND TH 2 Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version Detail To display the Thai language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND VN 2 Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application...

Page 678: ... Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO ZH 2 Useful feat intro Chinese file ver smpl Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO TW 2 Useful feat intro Chinese file v...

Page 679: ...o 99 99 INTRO NO 2 Dspl usful feat intro Norwegian file ver Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO PL 2 Dspl of usful feat intro Polish file ver Detail To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case ...

Page 680: ...uction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO TK 2 Dspl useful feat intro Turkish file ver Detail To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO CA 2 Dspl useful feat intro Catalan file ver Detail To ...

Page 681: ...IT 1 Dspl of quick menu Italian file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN DE 1 Dspl of quick menu German file version Detail To display the version of German language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to ...

Page 682: ...nge 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN HU 2 Dspl of quick menu Hungarian file ver Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN NL 2 Dspl of quick menu Dutch file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display ...

Page 683: ...y Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN RM 2 Dspl of quick menu Romanian file version Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN SK 2 Dspl of quick menu Slovak file version Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for Quick Menu application Use Case When upgrading the f...

Page 684: ...French file ver Detail To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT IT 1 Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver Detail To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT DE 1 Dspl o...

Page 685: ...00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT FI 2 Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT HU 2 Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware ...

Page 686: ...Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT CR 2 Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT RM 2 Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the...

Page 687: ...9 ACSBT EU 2 Dspl accessibility Euskera file ver Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS FR 1 Display of ERS French file version Detail To display the version of French language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmwa...

Page 688: ...Recovery System ERS DA 2 Display of ERS Danish file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS EL 2 Display of ERS Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmwa...

Page 689: ...m ERS RU 2 Display of ERS Russian file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS SL 2 Display of ERS Slovenian file version Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware D...

Page 690: ...When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS CA 2 Display of ERS Catalan file version Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS TH 2 Display of ERS Thai file version Detail To displ...

Page 691: ...itten in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Use Case When checking the EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Display Adj Set Range 0001 to 9999 LS UNT V 2 Display of Laser Scanner Unit version Detail To display the version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Use Case When checking the version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Display Adj Set Range 0001 to 9999 LS SRL 2 Display...

Page 692: ... Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX TW 2 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX KO 2 Display of BOX appli Korean file version Detail To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the ...

Page 693: ...e 00 01 to 99 99 BOX PT 2 Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX RU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Displ...

Page 694: ...ge 00 01 to 99 99 BOX TH 2 Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version Detail To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX VN 2 Dspl of BOX appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj S...

Page 695: ...Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SC EL 2 Display of SC appli Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SC ET 2 Dspl of SC appli Estonian file version Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading th...

Page 696: ...ge 00 01 to 99 99 SC ID 2 Display of SC appli Indonesian file ver Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SC BU 2 Dspl of SC appli Bulgarian file version Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the f...

Page 697: ...ion JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SC HI 2 Dspl of SC appli Hindi file version Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SC MS 2 Dspl of SC appli Malay file version Detail To display the version of Malay language file for Self Cop...

Page 698: ...o 99 99 LANG HI 2 Dspl of Hindi language file ver Detail To display the version of Hindi language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG EU 2 Dspl of Euskera language file ver Detail To display the version of Euskera language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display...

Page 699: ... connection state of Finisher related options Use Case When checking the connection of Finisher related options Display Adj Set Range Left column connection state of Finisher related options 1 to 5 1 Without Saddle 2 With Saddle without Folding Unit 3 With Saddle and Inserter without Folding Unit 4 With Saddle and Folding Unit without Inserter 5 With Saddle Inserter and Folding Unit Right column c...

Page 700: ...at is connected to PCI2 Display Adj Set Range No PCB connected iSLOT iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB Voice Board Voice PCB Voice Board R Voice Recognition PCB Display is hidden on this machine 3DES Board Encryption PCB 1Gbit Board Giga Ethernet PCB PCI3 1 Display of PCI3 connected PCB name Detail To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3 Use Case When checking name of the PCB that is connect...

Page 701: ...te Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Unit Appropriate Target Value 1 99 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ABS HUM 1 Display of outside moisture content Detail To display the absolute moisture content outside the machine This is measured by the Environment Sensor that detects the outside air Use Case When checking the moisture content outside the machine Adj Set Operate Method N A Di...

Page 702: ...only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Unit deg C Appropriate Target Value Room temperature Room temperature 15 deg C Amount of Change per Unit 1 HUM2 1 Display of estimated inside humidity Detail To display the estimated relative humidity inside the machine that is calculated from the estimated temperature inside the machine and moisture content outside the machine Use Case When checking the humidit...

Page 703: ...3500 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 200 3000 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P 1ATVC EX Amount of Change per Unit 1 1ATVC C 2 Dspl C clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control 1 1 speed for C color As Vb is closer to 3500 the Primary Transfer Roller is closer to the end of life so image failure leopard pattern image ...

Page 704: ... FFFF maximum is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Use Case At scanned image failure Display Adj Set Range 0 to FFFF Appropriate Target Value 512 2047 GAIN OB 2 Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit B Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Main Controll...

Page 705: ...il To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Main Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according to the value Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB When r...

Page 706: ... 2 For R D PVCONT K 2 For R D DENS COPIER Service mode for copier DISPLAY State display mode DENS DENS Y 1 Dspl Y color toner density change ratio Detail To display the deviation of Y color toner density from the target value in percentage If the deviation is not acceptable E020 occurs This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error i...

Page 707: ...perate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 700 to 700 Unit Appropriate Target Value 300 300 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C Amount of Change per Unit 0 01 DENS K 1 Dspl Bk color toner density change ratio Detail To display the deviation of Bk color toner density from the target value in percentage If the deviation is not acceptable E020 occurs This may be caused by deteri...

Page 708: ...image failure fogging carrier adherence low density etc Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 150 500 D C TRGT 2 Dspl C clr patch target dens ATR ctrl Detail To display the target density for C color patch image formed at ATR control Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure fogging carrier adherence low density etc Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Val...

Page 709: ...to 255 Appropriate Target Value 50 200 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS K DEV DC Y 2 Dspl of Y color developing DC voltage Detail To display the latest Y color developing DC voltage Vdc Use Case When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence When fogging occurs is deteriorated Display Adj Set Range 1000 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 490 600 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DEV D...

Page 710: ...se in density fogging occurs Display Adj Set Range 1600 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 1400 1200 Amount of Change per Unit 1 CHG DC C 2 Dspl C color primary charge DC voltage Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of C color Use Case When decrease in density fogging occurs Display Adj Set Range 1600 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 1400 1200 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ...

Page 711: ...D ratio detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection failure whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system Use Case When checking the toner density in the Developing Unit at low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 700 to 700 Unit Appropriate Target Value 300 3...

Page 712: ...upply log Detail To display the latest 8 Y color toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Appropriate Target Value 0 10 SPL LG M 2 Display of M color toner supply log Detail To display the latest 8 M color toner supply log...

Page 713: ...r Unit Front Use Case At low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 300 900 P B S Y 2 Dspl ITB rear side base intnsty Swave Detail To display the ITB background light intensity S wave detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear At low density or fogging deterioration use this item to check whether there is a problem in the Registration Pat...

Page 714: ...toner supply log Detail To display the latest 8 Bk color toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Appropriate Target Value 0 10 Y LED DA 1 Dspl rear side Patch Sensor intensity Detail To display the LED light intensity of ...

Page 715: ...ty failure Display Adj Set Range 00 to FF Appropriate Target Value 50 FF LPOWER K 2 Display of Bk clr laser light intensity Detail To display the Bk color laser light intensity in real time Use Case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display Adj Set Range 00 to FF Appropriate Target Value 50 FF TNRB IDY 1 Display of Y color Toner Container ID Detail To display the ID of Y color ...

Page 716: ...orrected Use Case When hue variation occurs Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT A C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A C color target VL Detail To display the C color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor i...

Page 717: ...atch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use Case When hue variation occurs Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT C M 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C M color target VL Detail To display the M ...

Page 718: ... SGNL A C 2 For R D SGNL A K 2 For R D SGNL B Y 2 For R D SGNL B M 2 For R D SGNL B C 2 For R D SGNL B K 2 For R D SGNL C Y 2 For R D SGNL C M 2 For R D SGNL C K 2 For R D SGNL C C 2 For R D DLTA A Y 2 For R D DLTA A M 2 For R D DLTA A C 2 For R D DLTA A K 2 For R D DLTA B Y 2 For R D DLTA B M 2 For R D DLTA B C 2 For R D DLTA B K 2 For R D DLTA C Y 2 For R D DLTA C M 2 For R D DLTA C C 2 For R D ...

Page 719: ...Paper Sensor PS05 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 13 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS04 0 Paper surface detec tion 12 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS07 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 11 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor PS06 0 Paper surface detec tion 10 9 Reverse Sensor PS12 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 8 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sen sor PS33 1 HP detected 7 6 5 4 3 2 Finisher Connection De t...

Page 720: ...1 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 3 2 Fixingt Delivery Sensor PS10 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 1 First Delivery Sensor PS14 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 0 Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor PS32 0 HP detected P006 15 14 13 Finisher U1 Connection Detection 0 Connected 12 3 Way Unit Connection Detection 1 Connected 11 Cassette Pedistal Con nection Detection 1 Connected 10 Multi purpose Tray Pape...

Page 721: ...assette 1 Size Switch_0 SW13 0 ON 1 OFF 7 Cassette 1 Size Switch_1 SW13 0 ON 1 OFF 6 Cassette 1 Size Switch_2 SW13 0 ON 1 OFF 5 Cassette 2 Size Switch A_ 0 SW15 0 ON 1 OFF 4 Cassette 2 Size Switch A_ 1 SW15 0 ON 1 OFF 3 Cassette 2 Size Switch A_ 2 SW15 0 ON 1 OFF 2 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_ 0 SW16 0 ON 1 OFF 1 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_ 1 SW16 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_ 2 SW16 0 ON 1 OF...

Page 722: ... 2 1 0 P018 0 15 P019 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Front Fan FM01 0 ON 1 LOCK STOP P020 0 15 P021 0 15 P022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS53 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence P023 15 14 Second Delivery Motor M31 0 ON 1 OFF 13 12 11 10 Reverce Motor M30 0 ON 1 OFF 9 8 Service Mode 710 ...

Page 723: ...07 0 ON 1 OFF 3 2 1 0 P027 0 15 P028 0 15 P029 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Duplex Merging Motor M14 0 ON 1 OFF 8 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 0 ON 1 OFF 7 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor M08 0 ON 1 OFF 6 Duplex Reverse Motor M11 0 ON 1 OFF 5 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_ 0 SW104 0 ON 1 OFF 4 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_ 1 SW104 0 ON 1 OFF 3 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_ 2 SW104 0 ON 1...

Page 724: ...e 3 Paper Sensor PS102 0 Paper absence 1 Pa per presence 4 Cassette 3 Lifter Sensor PS104 0 Paper absence 1 Pa per presence 3 2 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor PS103 0 Paper absence 1 Pa per presence 1 Cassette 4 Lifter Sensor PS105 0 Paper absence 1 Pa per presence 0 P031 0 15 P032 0 15 P033 0 15 P034 0 15 P035 0 15 P036 0 15 P037 0 15 P038 0 15 R CON P001 to P003 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P001 7 6...

Page 725: ...ument length sensor 1 SR7 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 5 4 Document width sensor 3 SR15 bit4 3 2 Range of original length 0 0 0 143 85 mm or less 0 0 1 236 45 263 5 mm 0 1 0 288 2 mmor more 0 1 1 263 5 288 2 mm 1 0 0 165 00 196 00 mm 1 0 1 196 00 212 95 mm 1 1 0 143 85 165 00 mm 1 1 1 212 95 236 45 mm 3 2 1 0 P003 7 Different width sensor 4 SR12 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 6 Different wid...

Page 726: ... PS8 1 HP 2 Assist HP sensor PS7 1 HP 1 Rear alignment plate HP sensor PS5 1 HP 0 Front alignment plate HP sensor PS4 1 HP P006 7 6 5 4 3 2 Stack tray HP sensor PS14 1 HP 1 0 P007 7 Delivery sensor PS1 1 Paper presence 6 5 4 3 2 Tray 1 Safety Switch MSW103 1 ON 1 0 Front Cover Switch MSW101 1 Open P008 7 Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 1 PCB5 0 ON 6 Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 3 PCB5 0 ON 5 Tray 2 Shift Are...

Page 727: ...ing Guide Height Sen sor PI123 1 Open 6 5 4 Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor PI109 0 HP 3 2 1 0 P013 0 7 P014 0 7 P015 0 7 P016 0 7 P017 7 Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 PI115 1 Paper presence 6 Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor PI114 1 Paper presence 5 Shutter HP Sensor PI113 0 Closed 4 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PI110 1 HP 3 Stapler Alignment Inter ference Sensor PI116 0 Interference 2 Staple Sensor PI52 0...

Page 728: ...nt SW7 1 HP 1 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI15 0 Top position 0 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor PI14 1 HP P022 0 7 P023 0 7 P024 7 6 5 4 3 2 Saddle Paper Folding HP Sensor PI21 1 HP 1 0 P025 0 7 P026 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Staple Sensor Rear SW4 1 Needle absence 0 P027 7 6 5 4 3 2 Saddle Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor PI8 0 Paper presence 1 Saddle Paper Positioning Plate HP Se...

Page 729: ... sor PI9 1 Open 2 Saddle No 3 Paper Sen sor PI20 1 Paper presence 1 Saddle No 2 Paper Sen sor PI19 1 Paper presence 0 Saddle No 1 Paper Sen sor PI18 1 Paper presence P032 0 7 P033 0 7 P034 0 7 P035 0 7 P036 0 7 P037 0 7 P038 0 7 P039 0 7 P040 0 7 P041 7 6 5 4 Buffer Pass Open Closed Sensor PI203 0 Open 3 2 1 Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202 0 Paper presence 0 Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201 0 Paper ...

Page 730: ...ting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ Y 1 Adj of img pstn in book mode horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction When replacing the Scanner Unit clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit enter the value of service label When the non...

Page 731: ...main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 100 to 100 Unit mm Appropriate Target Value 0 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RDSHDPOS Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ Y DF 1 Adj img pstn in DADF mode horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direct...

Page 732: ...rvice label As the value is incremented by 1 the image magnification changes by 0 1 Enlarge Reduce Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the servic...

Page 733: ...acing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 9999 Default Value 9418 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X W PLT Z COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 100 RG 1 RG clr displace correct 100 book mode Detail To correct the co...

Page 734: ...ner Unit execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by P PRINT beforehand Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2047 Default Value 1156 Related Service...

Page 735: ...perate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution It is recommended to use this item from situation mode Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG H C 1 Ruf adj C clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of C color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of ...

Page 736: ...recommended to use this item from situation mode Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 16 REG HS K 1 Fine adj Bk clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of less than 1 pixel Use Case When Bk color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occ...

Page 737: ... use this item from situation mode Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit line Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG H M 1 Ruf adj M clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of M color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When M color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter ...

Page 738: ...ected to all colors All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally changed Use Case When adjusting the standard magnification ratio due to parts replacement or environmental change etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 10 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 MAG V 1 Adj of...

Page 739: ... 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust the settings of LS H YC YR ML MC MR KL KC KR Display Adj Set Range 4 to 4 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT H COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H YC YR ML MC MR KL KC KR LS H...

Page 740: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 741: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 742: ...ion mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust ...

Page 743: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 744: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 745: ...YL YC YR ML MC MR KL KC SLOP Y 2 Adjustment of image squareness Detail To adjust skew of image squareness in the vertical scanning direction by adjusting skew of Y color laser in the vertical scanning direction digitally By performing auto color displacement correction after this adjustment adjustment is made for other colors in accordance with adjustment for Y color Use Case When corners of an im...

Page 746: ...ecuted the value is rewritten Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Default Value 350 It may vary by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M SGNL C 1 ATR patch C clr toner dens tgt VL entry Detail To enter the C color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB The C color toner density is detected by the Regi...

Page 747: ...nsity target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB The Bk color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit Bk is initialized Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller PCB clearing of RAM data and then re entering the value after the processing is done Adj Set Operate Method Enter the...

Page 748: ...he value when fogging scattering occurs In principle the value should be the same as that of LLMT PTC Use Case When an image failure density failure coarseness fogging carrier adherence scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Divis...

Page 749: ...he value is incremented by 1 the lower limit is increased by 0 5 Increase the value when a density failure coarseness occurs and decrease the value when fogging scattering occurs In principle the value should be the same as that of HLMT PTC Use Case When an image failure density failure coarseness fogging carrier adherence scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch...

Page 750: ...e density failure fogging carrier adherence etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Make 50 prints of approx 10 image ratio e g COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 4 times 3 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density If the target value is changed fogging may...

Page 751: ... target value determined upon initialization of the Developing Unit is changed the TD ratio is also changed Decrease the value when density increase occurs and increase the value when fogging occurs Use Case When an image failure density failure fogging carrier adherence etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Make 50 prints of...

Page 752: ...ented by 1 the lower limit is increased by 0 5 Increase the value when a density failure coarseness occurs and decrease the value when fogging scattering occurs In principle the value should be the same as that of HLMT PTK Use Case When an image failure density failure coarseness fogging carrier adherence scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive...

Page 753: ...by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M 4 CONT C 1 ATR Sensor C control voltage entry Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor C When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller P...

Page 754: ...y by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M D C LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch C clr correction VL Detail To enter the C color correction value of ATR patch The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit C is initialized When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When c...

Page 755: ...et Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When the Patch Sensor is replaced execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment quick adjustment Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3000 Appropriate Target Value 1200 BLANK COPIER Service mode for copier ADJUST Adjustment mode BLANK BLANK T 1 Adjustment of leading edge margin Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of pape...

Page 756: ...nit 1 BLANK B2 2 Adj of trailing edge margin thin rcycl 2 Detail To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of thin paper recycled paper 2 As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0423 mm Increase the value when blur at leading edge wrinkles occur with thin paper recycled paper 2 A value to which the setting value of BLANK B is added is ap...

Page 757: ...onal Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VCONT M 2 Adj of M color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for M color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 5 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller ...

Page 758: ...Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VCONT K 2 Adj of Bk color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Bk color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 5 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or ...

Page 759: ...is increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 1 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mod...

Page 760: ...s increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 2 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mode...

Page 761: ... black spots are alleviated but fogging is increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 2 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Un...

Page 762: ...r the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 128 to 128 Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment OFST P K 1 Bk density adj at test print reading Detail To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust When replacing the Scanner Unit clearing the RAM data of t...

Page 763: ...J K 1 Adjustment of color balance for Bk color Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk color when the density of Bk color varies between devices As the value is larger the image gets darker If the value is too large a transfer failure and or a fixing failure occurs Use Case Upon user s request to reduce density difference between devices Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the se...

Page 764: ... increase the value when the density of a document is light Decrease the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Use Case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative pos...

Page 765: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS M 2 Adj M low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 766: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS K 2 Adj Bk low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the se...

Page 767: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS M 2 Adj M mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the ...

Page 768: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS K 2 Adj Bk mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the...

Page 769: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS M 2 Adj M hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 770: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS K 2 Adj Bk hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the se...

Page 771: ...tem is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pres...

Page 772: ...item is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pre...

Page 773: ...is item is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and ...

Page 774: ...em is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press...

Page 775: ...conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR2 2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 2 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 2 Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV2 TR PPR2 and TR DUP2 When this condition is sat...

Page 776: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR4 2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 4 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 4 Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV4 TR PPR4 and TR DUP4 When this condition is satisf...

Page 777: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR6 2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 6 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 6 Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV6 TR PPR6 and TR DUP6 When this condition is satisf...

Page 778: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR8 2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 8 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 8 Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV8 TR PPR8 and TR DUP8 When this condition is satisf...

Page 779: ...environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR P...

Page 780: ...environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR P...

Page 781: ... image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR8 TR DUP8 TR VL8 2TR OFF Supplement Memo Up to 16 combination patterns can be set in TR VL1 to ...

Page 782: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP3 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 3 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV3 TR PPR3 and TR DUP3 When this condition is satis...

Page 783: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP5 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 5 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 5 Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV5 TR PPR5 and TR DUP5 When this condition is satis...

Page 784: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP7 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 7 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV7 TR PPR7 and TR DUP7 When this condition is satis...

Page 785: ...and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied 1TR TGY 2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt 1 1 speed Detail To adjust the target current for Y color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1 1 speed Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs and decrease the value when fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge The s...

Page 786: ...TVC control Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P 1ATVC EX Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 2TR OFF 1 Uniform adj sec trn ATVC ppr allot voltg Detail To unifor...

Page 787: ...e when fogging occurs especially in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge The setting is reflected at the next primary transfer ATVC control Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Related Service...

Page 788: ... only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 100 to 100 Unit mm Appropriate Target Value 40 40 Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 1ATVCTMG 2 Adj pry trns ATVC ctrl exe intvl 1 2SPD Detail To adjust the intervals the number of sheets to execute primary transfer ATVC control at 1 2 speed Decrease the value if the condition of image failure occurrence caused by primary transfer...

Page 789: ...ns environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR10 2 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 10 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 10 Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV10 TR PPR10 and TR DUP10 When this condition is satis...

Page 790: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR12 2 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 12 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 12 Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV12 TR PPR12 and TR DUP12 When this condition is ...

Page 791: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR14 2 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 14 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 14 Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV14 TR PPR14 and TR DUP14 When this condition is ...

Page 792: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR PPR16 2 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 16 Detail To set the paper type paper weight for setting 16 Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV16 TR PPR16 and TR DUP16 When this condition is ...

Page 793: ...ironment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR1...

Page 794: ...e environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR...

Page 795: ...n solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR16 TR DUP16 TR VL16 2TR OFF Supplement Memo Up to 16 combination patterns can be set in ...

Page 796: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP11 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 11 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV11 TR PPR11 and TR DUP11 When this condition i...

Page 797: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP13 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 13 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 13 Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV13 TR PPR13 and TR DUP13 When this condition i...

Page 798: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP15 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 15 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV15 TR PPR15 and TR DUP15 When this condition i...

Page 799: ... setting number is applied TR VL1 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 1 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 1 Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV1 TR PPR1 and TR DUP1 When this condition is satisfied the paper allotted voltage adjusted here is applied at the time of ...

Page 800: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL3 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 3 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV3 TR PPR3 and TR DUP3 When ...

Page 801: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL5 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 5 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 5 Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV5 TR PPR5 and TR DUP5 When ...

Page 802: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL7 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 7 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV7 TR PPR7 and TR DUP7 When ...

Page 803: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL9 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 9 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 9 Setting 9 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV9 TR PPR9 and TR DUP9 When ...

Page 804: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL11 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 11 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV11 TR PPR11 and TR DUP11...

Page 805: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL13 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 13 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 13 Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV13 TR PPR13 and TR DUP13...

Page 806: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL15 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 15 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV15 TR PPR15 and TR DUP15...

Page 807: ...ess OK key Caution Increase decrease the value by 1 at a time while checking the symptom Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 30 30 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV16 TR PPR16 TR DUP16 2TR OFF Supplement Memo Up to 16 combination patterns can be set in TR VL1 to 16 setting 1 to 16 When there is more than one setting where all conditions en...

Page 808: ...becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ C2 1 Write start pst...

Page 809: ...he left margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Displa...

Page 810: ...ft margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj...

Page 811: ...ing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 55 to 55 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 REG THCK 1 Adj registration start timing 1 2 speed Detail To adjust the timing...

Page 812: ...ide of paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed from a cassette is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Group of plain papers Plain paper 1 2 3 colored paper recycled paper pre punched paper tracing paper Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LP FEED2 1 Adj pre rgs...

Page 813: ... arch amount is changed by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from the Multi purpose Tray is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Group of heavy papers Heavy paper 1 2 3 4 coated paper...

Page 814: ...efault Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 2 EXT SPD 2 Setting of delivery speed at 1 1 speed Detail To set the delivery speed of papers thin paper 1 plain paper 1 2 3 colored paper 1 recycled paper 1 2 3 pre punched paper 1 and tracing paper which are fed at 1 1 speed in the case of delivering to the First Second Delivery Tray Set 2 if misalignment occurs with the papers when delivering to the Fi...

Page 815: ...m Increase Decrease Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of thin paper fed in 2 sided mode is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LP MULT3 1 Adj pre rgst arch amount thin MP Tray Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for thin paper...

Page 816: ... When registering a new value execute COPIER FUNCTION CST MF MIN Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When registering a new value Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Be sure to adjust MF MAX together with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Defau...

Page 817: ...S mode Detail To set the judgment area in ACS mode As the value is larger the judgment area is widened Use Case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 Default Value 1 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ACS CNT 2 Set jdgmt pixel count area...

Page 818: ... on images of COPY and SEND output Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Sharpness EXP LED COPIER Service mode for copier ADJUST Adjustment mode EXP LED PR EXP Y 2 Adj Cln Pre expo LED Y in...

Page 819: ...ghost occurs and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging Use Case When drum ghost occurs When horizontal lines appear due to charging Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When the value is increased horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier When the value is decreased drum ghost may occur Display A...

Page 820: ...host occurs and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging Use Case When drum ghost occurs When horizontal lines appear due to charging Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When the value is increased horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier When the value is decreased drum ghost may occur Display Ad...

Page 821: ...e When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Use this item only when replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED or replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Display...

Page 822: ...aning Pre exposure LED When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Use this item only when replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED or replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FUNCTION Operation inspection mode INSTALL COPIE...

Page 823: ...ation finished normally OK Required Time 150 sec Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y M C K STRD POS 1 Scan position auto adj in DADF mode Detail To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically Use Case At DADF installation uninstallation Adj Set Operate Method 1 Close the DADF 2 Select the item and then press OK key Close the DADF until the operation automatically stops after th...

Page 824: ... the Toner Density Sensor M 4 Primary transfer ATVC control 5 Initialization of the Registration Patch Sensor 6 Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 7 Reset of the Developing Unit counter Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit M Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Unit of other color do not use...

Page 825: ... to send device information such as the device counter failure and consumables to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol RGW PORT 1 Set port number of Sales Co s server Detail To set the port number of the sales company s server to be used for Embedded RDS Use Case When using Embedded RDS Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swit...

Page 826: ...aution Do not use Shift JIS character strings Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display Adj Set Range URL Default Value https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERDS DAT Supplement Memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter failure...

Page 827: ...g of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 7 Reset of the Developing Unit counter Use Case When replacing the Developing Units for all colors Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Use this item only when replacing Developing Units for 4 colors simultaneously Display Adj Set Range During operation xxx second remaining time At normal termination OK At abnormal terminatio...

Page 828: ...g Kong and the country area specified in COPIER OPTION FNC SW CONFIG Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CONFIG Supplement Memo CDS Contents Delivery System HD CRYP 1 Exe HDD Encrypt Board ini install mod Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the HDD Encryption Board By turning OFF the main power swi...

Page 829: ...6 18 19 TMP TB18 19 21 22 Supplement Memo Extra heavy paper heavy paper 221 to 300 g m2 1 sided coated paper 164 to 300 g m2 and 2 sided coated paper 164 to 300 g m2 CCD COPIER Service mode for copier FUNCTION Operation inspection mode CCD DF WLVL1 1 White level adj in book mode color Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used b...

Page 830: ...ue Detail To register the standard value of the minimum width on the Multi purpose Tray Make a fine adjustment by COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF MIN Adj Set Operate Method 1 Align the guide of the Multi purpose Tray with the minimum width 2 Select the item and then press OK key The value is registered after automatic adjustment Caution After execution check the registered value by COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ ...

Page 831: ...nd then press OK key 2 Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white black red green and blue 3 Press STOP key to terminate checking LED CHK 1 Checking of Control Panel LED Detail To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Check that the LED lights up in the order 3 Use LE...

Page 832: ...e item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required Time 1 min Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL MTR MTR ON FAN 1 Specification of operation fan Detail To specify the fan to operate Use Case When replacing the fan checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Enter the value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Ran...

Page 833: ... not pulled out NG is displayed 2 Do not make the motor operate too much because engagement disengagement of the Primary Transfer Roller is repeated 3 Do not make the motor operate as much as possible 4 The 2 motors operate simultaneously Do not make them operate continuously Otherwise flipping of the ITB Cleaning Blade or noise may occur 5 The Developing Motor and the Developing Cylinder Clutch a...

Page 834: ...01 E002 and E003 Use Case At error occurrence Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK DC CON 1 Clearing of DC Controller PCB RAM data Detail To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Use Case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Adj Set Operat...

Page 835: ...switch is turned OFF ON CNT MCON 1 Clear of Main Controller service counter Detail To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Related Service Mode COPIER COUNTER Supplement Memo See COUNTER for the target counter CNT DCON 1 Clear of DC Cont...

Page 836: ...learing of card ID related data Detail To clear the data related to the card ID department Use Case When clearing the data related to the card ID Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON The login screen is displayed immediately after start up To display the main menu ...

Page 837: ...of the Embedded RDS stored in the SRAM SCM values are ON OFF of E RDS server s port number server s SOAP URL and communication schedule with the server how often the data is acquired etc The value set by COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG is cleared Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the E RDS environment Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution...

Page 838: ... included using SST or a USB memory Caution A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a USB memory after the execution of this item If installation is not executed uninstallation will be canceled Status of the machine remains the same as it was before execution Supplement Memo After the execution language displayed on the screen becomes English...

Page 839: ...t may move and get damage By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before moving damage can be prevented Use Case When moving the installed machine Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place with a screw when moving the Reader after installation...

Page 840: ...itive Drum for visual check Since the Pre exposure LED is not lighted up while the Front Door is open release the Interlock It automatically stops after all LEDs light up Use Case When checking that the Pre exposure LEDs lights up Adj Set Operate Method 1 Open the Front Door 2 Remove the Photosensitive Drum 3 Release the Interlock 4 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to remove t...

Page 841: ... machine with detailed information logs for 5000 jobs at a maximum The difference between PJH P 1 and this item is only the number of outputs Text data is saved in HDD as a file PJH P 2 RPT TXT Use Case When outputting the print job logs with detailed information Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished norma...

Page 842: ...ey Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P RPT FILE TNRB PRT 1 Output of Toner Container ID report Detail To output the ID of the Toner Container in the form of a report Text data is saved in HDD as a file TNRB PRT RPT TXT Use Case When checking the ID of the Toner Container Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 12 digit alphanumeric Related Service...

Page 843: ... For 2 5 and 6 HD CLEAR HD CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them By selecting 8 HD CLEAR HD CHECK is also executed to 7 9 11 and 17 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR HD CHECK HD CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK TYPE at the next startup Use Case When E602 E614...

Page 844: ... Backup of Reader setting data Detail To back up setting data of the Reader in the Scanner Unit memory to the HDD Use Case When clearing setting data of the Reader at the time of troubleshooting Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of ti...

Page 845: ...n setting a new condition is necessary read the operation setting file provided by R D from the USB memory Use Case When changing the conditions for automatic save of debug logs When setting a new condition Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION DBG LOG LOG2USB LOG2SRVR HIT STS 2 Display of debug lo...

Page 846: ...SLCT 2 ON OFF of scan area calculate function Detail To set ON OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size When the paper size is larger than the original size selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 T...

Page 847: ... Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ W SCNR 1 For R D ORG LGL 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode LGL Detail To set the size of special paper LGL configuration that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode Use Case Upon user s request When picking up special paper size original from DADF Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting ...

Page 848: ...play Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 LEDGER R 1 Argentine LETTER Default Value 0 INTROT 2 1 Set auto adj exe interval last rotation Detail To set the interval the number of sheets to execute automatic adjustment at last rotation As the value is changed by 1 the interval the number of sheets is changed by 1 sheet Use Case When matching the use environment of the user Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setti...

Page 849: ...splay Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Detail To set ON OFF for global support of document size detection in copyboard reading mode Use Case Upon user s request mixed media original with AB Inch configuration Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The Docum...

Page 850: ...dj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Go through the following COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ and if MODEL SZ is 0 AB configuration this mode is enabled Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not supported 1 Supported Default Value JP 0 USA 0 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 1 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Supple...

Page 851: ...iation occurs set the value of this item to 1 and check the hue If hue variation is alleviated analyze the cause of ARCDAT control error developer Patch Sensor etc Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 when ARCDAT control is back to normal When a job is submitted during D half control at la...

Page 852: ...tem administrator service technician When system administrator service technician is set enter the password for system administrator at the user s site followed by password for service technician Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 No passw...

Page 853: ...uality mode Detail To set the image quality mode When 0 is set the image quality priority mode is enabled When this mode is enabled gray color is reproduced with process colors in all cases When 1 is set the counter priority mode is enabled When 2 is set the image quality priority photo mode is enabled For photo gray color is reproduced with process colors For text and graphic it is reproduced wit...

Page 854: ...Contents Delivery System LOCLFIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by file Detail To set whether to allow the user administrator to update firmware from the remote UI using a local file This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations Use Case When prohibiting the administrator to update firmware using a file Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then pre...

Page 855: ...use of a problem Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 JLK PWSC 2 ON OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan Detail To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application Use Case When scanning the PCAM password authentication document Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value...

Page 856: ...Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Drawing algorithm of iR ADV C series 1 Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series 2 3 For R D use Default Value 0 CDS LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update Detail To set whether to allow the user administrator to perform periodical update linked with CDS When 1 is set setting of periodical update can be made in Settings Registration menu via remote UI When...

Page 857: ... 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern Use Case Upon user s request not to use the Unified Authentication function Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Unified Authentication A function which enables the...

Page 858: ... Not used 1 Used Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM Additional Functions Mode Management Settings License Other Register Update Software Software Management Settings Connected Server Settings Supplement Memo iW EMC device firmware update plug in is required to use local CDS SELF CHK 2 ON OFF high voltg error detect function Detail To set whether to detect high volta...

Page 859: ...e toner level is calculated based on the toner supply count some errors may occur Display Adj Set Range 0 to 40 Unit Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK Amount of Change per Unit 1 D DLV BK 1 Set Bk Drum prior dvry alarm notice tmg Detail To set the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Drum Unit Bk Use Case When changin...

Page 860: ...rrence of 0071 jam Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Display as a jam 1 Display as an error Default Value 0 ASLPMAX 1 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value Detail To set the maximum auto sleep shift time Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0...

Page 861: ...ntroller If combination of firmware versions of PCB option stored in the Main Controller and the version in PCB option after installation replacement is not appropriate operation with the combination of firmware versions has not yet been checked failure where analysis is difficult may occur It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine and automatically write the firmwa...

Page 862: ...ion time when feeding extra long size paper When the result is a negative value the time becomes 0 second Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the edge and decrease the value when prioritizing productivity Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the edge while feeding extra long size paper When reducing downtime Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive...

Page 863: ...ress OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 OFF No Inbox function Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox 1 ON Inbox function is active 2 ON Storing is available with PDL to Inbox although no display on the Control Panel remote UI Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences Display Settings Store Location Display Settings Mail Box UI SEND 2 ON O...

Page 864: ...etwork related error display Detail To set OFF ON of network related error message display When setting 0 while the machine is not connected to network the network related error message Check the network connection is not displayed Use Case When using the machine only as a copy machine Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Displa...

Page 865: ...se Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 UI WEB 2 ON OFF of Web browser screen display Detail To set whether to display the Web browser screen Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn ...

Page 866: ... Gradation Full Adjust RMT CNSL 1 Allow console application connection Detail To set whether to allow connection from a console application RemoteConsole When 1 is set logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on a PC Use Case When collecting logs of MEAP application Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main ...

Page 867: ...egistration menu When 1 to 3 is set Clean Condensation is displayed and the level of the effect of condensation cleaning can be set As the value is larger the effect is increased because the condensation cleaning is executed more frequently but cleaning time are increased In the case of installation in a low temperature and high humidity environment in winter ask for the user s opinion and configu...

Page 868: ...SP 1 ON OFF of DADF Roll counter initial scrn Detail To set whether to display the DADF Roller on the counter initialization screen in Settings Registration menu Use Case When the user does not replace the parts Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 2TR DSP 1 ON OFF of Sec Trn Out Rol cntr init scrn Detail To se...

Page 869: ...1 Display User Name Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Secured Print Job Status NETWORK COPIER Service mode for copier OPTION Specification setting mode NETWORK RAW DATA 2 Setting of received data print mode Detail To set print mode for the received image data This item is used to identify the cause whether it s due to image data or image processing in the case of problem with received imag...

Page 870: ...35 Default Value 110 FTPTXPN 2 Specify SEND destination port FTP No Detail To specify destination port FTP number for SEND Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Default Value 21 STS PORT 2 Not used CMD PORT 2 Not used NS CMD5 2 Limit CRAM MD5 auth method SMTP auth Deta...

Page 871: ...when it s authenticated NS PLNWS 2 Limit plaintext auth SMTP auth encry Detail To restrict use of PLAIN LOGIN authentication which is plaintext authentication at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Disp...

Page 872: ... Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the print server is connected Otherwise you cannot browse remote UI of the device in which MEAP authentication application is running Port 8080 is reserved for redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side Display Adj Set Range 1 to 65535 Default Value 8000 RMT LGIN 2 For R D CHN...

Page 873: ...the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 60 to 65535 Unit sec Default Value 600 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW Amount of Change per Unit 1 WUEV POT 2 Set port number for sleep notification Detail To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode When WUEV SW is 0 this setting is enabled Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and the...

Page 874: ...ttached As the value is incremented by 1 the number of target characters in e mail text is increased by 1 character Use Case When reducing printouts of blank paper due to e mail received by IFAX Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that e mail text is not printed if the nu...

Page 875: ...et which activates recovery from sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used Use Case When selecting protocol for sleep recovery Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 WSD and SNMP 2 WSD and CPCA 3 CPCA and SNMP Default Value 1 802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802 1X authentication timeout ...

Page 876: ... to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Supplement Memo Network Configurator function Used for communication with NetSpot Device Installer etc The network settings can be made remotely IKEINTVL 1 Setting of IKE retry interval Detail To set retry interval in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 En...

Page 877: ...ilter log However logs of multicast broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded and consequently the number of logs is increased Use Case Upon user s request to collect all filter logs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch C...

Page 878: ... SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 IPMTU 1 Setting of MTU size Detail To set MTU size of network packet Use this mode when performing SEND communication between locations...

Page 879: ... Case Upon user s request for customization Job assignment from Print Scan Fax driver at department management AiRFAX transmission job assignment Setting changing of system administrator function from a remote utility such as iWEMC Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution With TYPE 1 compatibility with conventional drivers a...

Page 880: ...isplay Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ASCII mode 1 BIN mode Default Value 0 SSLMODE 2 Setting of HTTP HTTPS port open close Detail To set whether to open or close HTTP HTTPS port When 1 is set while Use HTTP is ON and SSL Settings is OFF in Settings Registration menu HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed When 2 is set while both Use HTTP and SSL Settings are ON in Settings Registration menu HTT...

Page 881: ... the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 480 Unit min Default Value 60 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT AINR TM 2 Set time not in use for drum idl rtn exe Detail To set the time the machine is not in use that is the condition to execute idle rotation of the drum When the machine is not used for more than the specified time idle rotation of the drum 60 seconds is executed at warm...

Page 882: ...40 deg C or higher 1 Whole temperature range 2 Disabled Default Value 0 LES CNDS 2 Set of condensation prevention mode Detail To set the mode to prevent condensation When 1 or 2 is set idle rotation of the Reverse Roller is performed even when paper is delivered to the First Delivery Tray in the case of 1 sided output In the case of 2 sided output operation differs depending on whether the 3 Way U...

Page 883: ...Normally a solid single Bk color patch with 80 mm width is formed on the ITB and surface active agent is removed together with the toner every time after feeding 10 sheets at paper interval and 5 sheets at last rotation As the value is changed by 1 the number of sheets at paper interval and last rotation is changed by 1 sheet When the value is decreased in the case of using transparency to which s...

Page 884: ... envelope at 1 2 speed default in the case of a high humidity environment the glue flap may adhere at the time of fixing As a result of that the envelope may not be opened When 1 1 speed is set adhesion can be prevented but fixing performance is decreased in a low humidity environment Use Case When a glue flap of envelope adheres Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key...

Page 885: ...sed by 2 deg C upper limit is 273 deg C Use Case When alleviating fixing offset on the edge of paper and improving productivity Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 4 to 4 4 20 deg C 3 15 deg C 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 2 deg C 2 4 deg C 3 6 deg C 4 8 deg C Unit deg C Defau...

Page 886: ...ting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 5 to 1000 Unit sheet Default Value 100 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT2 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ARC INT2 2 Set ARCDAT ctrl exe intvl last rotation Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ARCDAT control at lost rotation ARCDAT control is not executed at paper interval while feeding the specified num...

Page 887: ...age if there is dust With dust detection correction control the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected DFDST L2 1 DADF mode dust dtct level adj after job Detail To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of...

Page 888: ... copy When moire occurs on a copy image set 0 suitable for character reproduction When halftone dots are rough set 2 Use Case When moire occurs on a copy image or when halftone dots are rough Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Error diffusion 1 Low screen ruling 2 High screen ruling Default Value...

Page 889: ... OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 High screen ruling gray compensation LUT 1 Error diffusion gray compensation LUT 2 High screen ruling normal LUT Default Value 0 SCN FLG 2 Select of image area flag copy image Detail To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a scanned...

Page 890: ...ode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Adjust Toner Amount at Color Printing TMIC BK 2 ON OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct Detail To set ON OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used by TMIC When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON the density of the high density area becomes high and consequently text and thin lines become clear While an im...

Page 891: ...nto vector data Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line as a thin line For the thin line the line width can be specified Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide width line as one line rather than as an outline when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality Use Case Upon user s request ...

Page 892: ...y 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 Default Value 2 Supplement Memo AST Advanced Smoothing Technology ERS SEL1 1 Set 1200 dpi ERS process PS Expnsn Kit Detail To set ERS processing when making 1200 dpi output with the PS Expansion Kit installed The processing is changed only for graphics and images and ERS weighting processing is performed to characters Set 1 when hu...

Page 893: ... user does not satisfy with the default adjustment values Use Case When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying yellowed blank paper as an original Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode not only the background of yellowed blank paper but also other light...

Page 894: ...tionally in all environments not depending on how long the machine is not used Default Value 1 Supplement Memo Warm up rotation is executed automatically at power on and recovery from sleep mode when the machine is not used for 8 hours or more regardless of environment PCHINT V 2 Adj ATR control patch detection interval Detail To adjust the total video counter value as the intervals to execute pat...

Page 895: ... and toner consumption is increased As the value is decreased productivity and toner consumption are improved but coarseness gets worse Use Case While printing low duty images images with low image ratio When graininess coarseness or decrease in density occurs When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative p...

Page 896: ...ment with ADJ VPP VPPN If the value is too large white gap white spots may occur Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Normal 1 Thin line improvement mode 1 2 Thin line improvement mode 2 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ADJ VPP ADJ VPPN DMX OF Y 2 Adj of Y color D max target density Detail To adjust the target density of D max control in the case where density of solid area on ...

Page 897: ...Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 ADJ VPPN 2 Adj of dev AC bias Vpp 1 2 SPD Detail To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias at 1 2 speed When the value is decreased ring marks or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference on a halftone image is alleviated When the value is increased white spots or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference on a solid image is alleviated Use Case Wh...

Page 898: ...Specification setting mode IMG FIX FX S TMP 1 Set ITOP control temp plain 1 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on th...

Page 899: ...OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 TMP TBL5 1 Set fixing control temperature thin ppr Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 52 to 63 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs...

Page 900: ... when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm of heavy paper 2 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Displ...

Page 901: ...urs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm of envelope Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner do...

Page 902: ...rature control is not performed Selecting 1 has an advantage over selecting 0 in terms of the life of the Fixing Unit However selecting 1 does not always extend the life Use Case When preferring to extend the life of the Fixing Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 is set FCOT becomes longer Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 903: ...re is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on coated paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amou...

Page 904: ...neven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm of transparency Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edg...

Page 905: ...isplay Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 THIN LP 2 Set of fixing arch control thin paper Detail To set the arch amount between the secondary transfer and fixing when feeding thin paper 52 to 63 g m2 at 1 1 speed Increase the value when an image failure crawled marks wrinkles occurs Use Case When an image ...

Page 906: ...ure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs when setting an extreme value Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 ...

Page 907: ...ethod Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display Adj Set Range 3 to 2 3 15 deg C 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 PLN LP 2 Se...

Page 908: ...e occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner doe...

Page 909: ... of paper Use Case When uneven gloss a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge 74 mm of coated paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 de...

Page 910: ...er Toner does not peel off Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS TM18 1 Set ITOP control temp extra long hvy 1 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra long heavy paper 1 2 3 4 coated paper 1 2 3 and label width 300 to 305 mm As the value is changed by 1 the control temperatu...

Page 911: ...r coated paper 3 164 to 220 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on coated paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too l...

Page 912: ... the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on extra long heavy paper 1 2 3 4 coated paper 1 2 3 and label Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure...

Page 913: ...re for plain paper 1 2 3 recycled paper 1 2 3 thin paper colored paper tracing paper pre punched paper and bond paper at 1 2 speed As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper etc at 1 2 speed Adj Set Opera...

Page 914: ...Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Address book maintenance tool Tool provided from CMJ DEV SP1 2 Device special settings 1 Detail To execute the device special setting Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ma...

Page 915: ... 6 Detail To execute the device special setting Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this setting only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP7 2 Device special settings 7 Detail To execute the device special setting Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter ...

Page 916: ...elated Service Mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW WT WARN Supplement Memo With the default setting the message is displayed after counting up approx 3000 counts calculated with 30 color ratio and 5 image ratio from the point that the Waste Toner Sensor PCB UN30 is ON Amount of Change per Unit 600 DFEJCLED 1 ON OFF of DADF delivery LED Detail To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF Use Case Up...

Page 917: ...tail To execute the device special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 0 RDEV SP6 2 RCON device special settings 6 Detail To execute the device special setting Use Case For ...

Page 918: ...uest Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Sleep Time Supplement Memo The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in Settings Registration Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Sleep Time SIZE DET 2 ON OFF ...

Page 919: ...of software counter 4 Detail To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen Use Case Upon user dealer s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default Value It differs according to the location COUNTER5 1 Setting of software counter 5 Detail To set co...

Page 920: ...Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Unlimited 1 Limited Default Value 1 CONTROL 1 Charge setting of PDL job Detail To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connected charge management device Coin Manager or non Canon made control card Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main pow...

Page 921: ...from the Inner Finisher Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Copy Options CNT DISP 2 ON OFF of serial No display Detail To set whether to display the serial number on the Counter Check screen Use Case When not displaying the serial number on the Counter Check screen Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 922: ... Mode Management Settings Charge Management Charge Log PCL COPY 2 Set of PCL COPIES command control method Detail To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL Select whether to use the control method of Canon made PCL or use a method equivalent to that of non Canon made PCL Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF...

Page 923: ...Function Settings Copy Select Color Settings for Copy Use Auto Color Black White DFLT BOX 1 Setting of color mode for Mail Box scan Detail To set the default color mode for Mail Box scan operation To reflect the change it is necessary to initialize the default settings of scan and store function in the screen displayed by pressing Scan in the main menu with one of the following methods Settings Re...

Page 924: ... the size of transmission data is always restricted regardless of the setting Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Limited 1 Unlimited Restriction applies when data goes through the server Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Set...

Page 925: ... Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Without restriction 1 With restriction password entry required Default Value 0 PTJAM RC 2 Setting of auto reprint at PDL print jam Detail To set whether to automatically restart printing after clearing jam that occurs with PDL print Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1...

Page 926: ...etwork between multiple hosts PC etc Job grouping function A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1 0 It enables to prevent job interruption from other PC by grouping jobs sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission COUNTER7 1 Setting of software counter 7 Detail To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check screen Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set O...

Page 927: ... the setting to execute operation to restrict specification Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving Use Case When using the job archive function Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution Setting cannot be made with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON 32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Bit0 Function to obtain image file 0 OFF 1 ON Bit1 ...

Page 928: ...ail To set whether to allow file transmission to a newly entered address When 1 is set file transmission is not available by entering the address because File is not displayed on the transmission screen The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swi...

Page 929: ... screen Detail To set whether to display the charge disable screen for switching between charge and no charge When 1 is set the charge disable screen is displayed and it becomes possible to switch to the mode in which all the services are available for free store manager mode by temporarily canceling the charging system Use Case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily...

Page 930: ...ke the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution Setting cannot be made with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Packet JPEG 1 Raster JPEG Default Value 0 HDCR DSW 1 ON OFF of HDD complete deletion display Detail To set whether to display Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion in Settings Registration menu...

Page 931: ...dj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device USBI DSP 2 ON OFF USB input device MEAP driver use Detail To set whether to display Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device in Settings Registration menu When 0 is set the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the sett...

Page 932: ... Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value JP 1 USA 0 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 0 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 Additional Functions Mode Function Settings Common Generate File Rights Management Server Settings JA SBOX 2 Setting of linking with Advanced Box SAM Detail To set whether to allow linkage with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled Use Case When canceling the operation restriction while iW SAM is enabl...

Page 933: ... OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Default Value 0 JA PREV 2 Setting of preview page deletion SAM Detail To set whether to allow deleting a page from the scan preview screen when iW SAM is enabled Use Case When canceling the operation restriction while iW SAM is enabled Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ...

Page 934: ...value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Default Value 0 JA WEB 2 Setting of Inbox document upload SAM Detail To set whether to allow uploading of Inbox document with the Web browser when iW SAM is enabled Use Case When canceling the operation restriction while iW SAM is enabled Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 935: ...setting and address Default Value JP 1 USA 0 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 0 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 FAXSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the Fax screen Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set...

Page 936: ...ct print PDF Detail To set output paper size at direct print PDF Usually the region defined by MediaBox is output However in some cases the region defined trimmed by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF Use Case When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox while rec...

Page 937: ... prematurely Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The message does not disappear unless the Toner Container is changed back to the one before the replacement Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the above specifications before making the setting Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 TNRBRMVR...

Page 938: ... Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection CST4 P1 1 Setting of Cst4 paper size A5R STMTR Detail To set the paper size A5R STMTR used in the Cassette 4 Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default Value JP...

Page 939: ...the location where K size paper can be selected in the Control Panel menu For other locations only EXEC can be set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When K size paper cannot be selected in the Control Panel menu only the setting value 0 can be set Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 EXEC 1 16K Default Value 0 Supplement Memo 16K pa...

Page 940: ... items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 from 0 to 2 when setting 4 The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 from 4 once the mode has been changed COPIER OPTION USER AFN PSWD 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX UI RSCAN UI EPRNT UI HOLD 0 Management Settings Device Management Display Log OFF Display Adj Set Range 0 to 7 0 No charge...

Page 941: ...s set output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets When 2 is set processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default Value 0 UNIT PRC 2 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin ...

Page 942: ... Memo When a value larger than the maximum amount is entered in Settings Registration menu as the charging amount it causes an error MIC TUN 1 Manual adj of voice recognize microphone Detail To manually adjust the voice receiving level sensitivity of the connected voice recognition microphone Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in Settings Registration menu however adjust it manually as ...

Page 943: ...Service mode for copier OPTION Specification setting mode INT FACE NWCT TM 2 Setting of network connection timeout Detail To set the time to keep network connection between the machine and the PC application keep alive setting As the value is changed by 1 the time is changed by 1 minute Use Case When using PC application Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn...

Page 944: ...tion is disabled with license transfer This item is enabled when the SEND function has been installed Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST ENPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR ENPDF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SPDF 2 Inst state dspl searchable PDF TX func Detail To display installation st...

Page 945: ...l direct print PDF func Detail To display installation state of direct print PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether direct print PDF function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PDFDR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PDFDR Display Adj Set Range When ...

Page 946: ...Detail To display transfer license key to use BarDIMM when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST BRDIM 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR BRDIM Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST VNC 2 Install state dspl remote operators soft Detail To display installati...

Page 947: ...unction with license transfer Use Case When checking whether high compression PDF function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST HRPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR HRPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR HRPDF 2 Trns lcns key...

Page 948: ... function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST WTMRK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR WTMRK Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST TSPDF 2 Inst state dspl time stp PDF TX func JP Detail To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function JP only when...

Page 949: ...ion when disabling the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether device signature PDF transmission function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST DVPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR DVPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting...

Page 950: ...eplacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST AMS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR AMS Display Adj Set Range 24 digits Supplement Memo AMS Access Management System ST ERDS 2 Install state dspl E RDS 3rd pty extsn Detail To display installation state of E RDS non Canon made extension function when disabling the function with license transfer Us...

Page 951: ...hen disabling the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether PCL function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PCL Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value 0 TR PCL 2 Transfer license key dspl PCL function Detail To dis...

Page 952: ...sfer license key to use UFR II function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST LIPS5 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR LIPS5 Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST LIPS4 2 Install state display of LIPS4 func JP Detail To display installation state of LI...

Page 953: ...abling the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether PCL UFR II function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCLUF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PCLUF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR PCLUF 2 Trns licens...

Page 954: ... display transfer license key to use PS PCL UFR II function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PSPCU 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCU Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST LXUFR 2 Install state display of UFR II function Detail To display in...

Page 955: ...ion when disabling the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether Document Scan Lock function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR JBLK Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR J...

Page 956: ...nse key to use reader extensions PDF function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST REPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR REPDF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST OOXML 2 Inst state dspl Office Open XML TX func Detail To display installation stat...

Page 957: ...te Method 1 Select ST 2600 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR 2600 Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR 2600 2 Trn lcns key dspl IEEE2600 1 scrty func Detail To display transfer license key to use security function of IEEE2600 1 when the functi...

Page 958: ...ault Value According to the setting at shipment TR NCAPT 2 Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func Detail To display transfer license key to use network packet capture function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing the HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST NCAPT 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed u...

Page 959: ...print output The setting is enabled for test print only Use Case At problem analysis Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 14 0 Error diffusion 1 Low screen ruling approx 133 to 190 lines 2 High screen ruling approx 200 to 268 lines 3 to 4 Not used 5 Error diffusion with trailing edge adjustment 6 High screen ruling with trailing edge adjus...

Page 960: ...Adj of Bk color density at test print Detail To adjust Bk color density when performing test print TYPE 5 As the value is larger the image gets darker Use Case At test print TYPE 5 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 128 COLOR Y 1 Setting of Y color output at test print Detail To set whether to output Y color at the time...

Page 961: ...ut 1 Output Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER TEST PG COLOR Y M C F M SW 1 Setting of PG full color single color Detail To set whether to output PG in full color or single color Use Case When identifying the cause whether it s due to full color or single color Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Full color 1 Single color Def...

Page 962: ...connect again and then go to step 5 6 Select the item and enter loopback address and then press OK key and Start key OK TCP IP setting of this machine is normal Go to step 7 to check NIC NG TCP IP setting of this machine has failure Go to step 3 to check the setting again 7 Select the item and enter the local host address and then press OK key OK Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal ...

Page 963: ...ional Functions Mode Preferences Network Store Network Packet Log STT STP 2 Start and stop of network packet capture Detail To start and stop network packet capture Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Stop 1 Start Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER TEST NET CAP Additional Functions Mode Preferences Network Store Network Packe...

Page 964: ... and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch SIMPFILT 2 Settings of packet data filtering Detail To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data When 0 is set filtering is not performed All the data are captured When 1 is set packet data is captured only when the receiver s or sender s address coincides with the Mac address of this machine Use Case At problem analysis ...

Page 965: ... is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position Thus handle it with care Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 0 OFF 20 Pre registration 1st side 21 Pre registration 2nd side 1 30 Pre fixing 1st side 31 Pre fixing 2nd side 1 32 Post fixing 1st side 33 Post fixing 2nd side 1 40 Second Delivery 1st side 2 41 ...

Page 966: ... Use Case When checking the counter Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT 1 Inbox print counter Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case When checking the counter Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 RPT PRT 1 Report print counter Detail To count up when the printout is delivered out...

Page 967: ...ng the pickup counter Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C4 1 Cassette 4 pickup total counter Detail Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case When checking the pickup counter Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 MF 1 Multi purpose Tray pickup total counter Detail Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Ca...

Page 968: ...jam occurrences in the machine Use Case When checking the total jam counter of copier Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 FEEDER 1 Feeder total jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Feeder Use Case When checking the total number of jams in the Feeder Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 SORTER ...

Page 969: ...splay Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 C3 1 Cassette 3 pickup jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 3 Use Case When checking the jam counter of the Cassette 3 Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 C4 1 Cassette 4 pickup jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cass...

Page 970: ...ch half turn of the Toner Container Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit block Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ALLPW ON 1 For R D HDD ON 1 Number of hard disk start up times Detail To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON Use Case When judging whether to shift the machine to power saving state after using the printer or s...

Page 971: ...ime Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 SDL NDL 1 Saddle staple needle counter Fin U1 Detail To count the use of the saddle staple needle Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 SUC A Y 2 For R D SUC A M 2 For R D SUC A C 2 For R D SUC A K 2 For R D FIN PTH 1 For R D FR STPL 1 For R D Amount of Change per Unit 1 MSTP B 1 For R D MSTPL 1 For R D STPL 2P 1 For R D STPL F 1 For R D STPL R 1 For...

Page 972: ...d life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per...

Page 973: ... value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit ...

Page 974: ... Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DV U...

Page 975: ...ed life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change pe...

Page 976: ...ed life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change pe...

Page 977: ...mated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change...

Page 978: ...e Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FX UP F...

Page 979: ... value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit ...

Page 980: ...mated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change...

Page 981: ...thod To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 TR ROLK 1 Primary Transfer Roller Bk prts counter Detail Primary Transfer Roller Bk Due to engage...

Page 982: ...ion Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacem...

Page 983: ...ious replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet De...

Page 984: ...arts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Supplement Memo The counter is advanced at each opening and closing Amount of Chang...

Page 985: ...ife value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Un...

Page 986: ... 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Am...

Page 987: ...e after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Related Service Mode SORTER FUNCTION FR ST RP Amount of Change per Unit 1 V CNTR COPIER Service mode for copier COUNTER Counter mode V CNTR TOTAL 1 Video count total counter Detail To display the total of video count values YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN BLACK Use Case When checking the distribution of user s video count Adj Se...

Page 988: ... 3 MID 3 or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use Case When checking the distribution of user s video count Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Supplement Memo Video count The number of sheets for each image ratio classification LOW MID HIGH for each color on a A4 size conversion basis which is stored in the controller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is counted as small si...

Page 989: ...ntroller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is counted as small size with 5 image ratio x 2 sheets BLACK 1 Bk color video count counter Detail To display the number of sheets small size 1 large size 2 as the distribution of Bk color image ratio LOW less than 3 MID 3 or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use Case When checking the distribution of user s video count Adj Set Operate ...

Page 990: ...ecomes 0 Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 Unit Amount of Change per Unit 1 K DRM LF 1 Display of Drum Unit Bk life Detail To display how much the Drum Unit Bk is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 Unit Amount of Change per Unit 1 8 Se...

Page 991: ...When installing DADF When replacing the Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When setting an extreme value the error E302 shading error may occur Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LA SPEED 1 Fine adj img magnifictn DADF ver...

Page 992: ...h to be operated The Clutch is activated by CL ON Use Case At operation check Adj Set Operate Method Enter the value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Pickup Clutch CL1 1 Registration Clutch CL2 Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION CL ON CL ON 1 Operation check of DADF Clutch Detail To start operation check for the Clutch specified by CL CHK Use Case At operation check Adj Set O...

Page 993: ...K key The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops 2 Press OK key The operation check is completed Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed STOP is not displayed Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION MTR CHK ROLL CLN 1 Rotation of DADF Rollers D...

Page 994: ... 1 staple position on A4R LGL LTRR paper As the value is changed by 1 the staple position is moved by 0 49 mm Toward rear Toward front Use Case When the A4R LGL LTRR paper front staple position is displaced Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 6 to 6 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 49 STP R1 1 Adj ...

Page 995: ...of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 SDL STP 1 Adj of Saddle Stitcher stpl pstn Fin U1 Detail To adjust the staple position at the time of...

Page 996: ... Display Adj Set Range 17 to 33 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 2 PRCS RET 1 Adj Process Tray return amount Fin U1 Detail To adjust the return amount of the paper on the Processing Tray When the value is increased by 1 the return amount is decreased by 1 4 mm Use Case When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK ...

Page 997: ...r stack delivery less than seven sheets of paper Use Case When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered When stack over detection is earlier than an assumption Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Supplement Memo This mode is enabled in any of the following cases When non sort mode is selected for LDR pa...

Page 998: ...de Fin U1 Detail To set ON OFF of tray switching speed up mode Set to 1 when the time for switching the stack tray is long When 1 is set the stack tray shift speed becomes faster and the productivity improves When tray switching noise reduction mode TRY NIS is ON the setting is disabled Use Case When the Stack Tray switching time is long Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then pres...

Page 999: ... full alarm for saddle stitching Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set the saddle delivery sensor stationary jam may occur because the paper stack on the saddle delivery tray block up the saddle delivery port Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF Alarm detection 1 ON Non Alarm detection Default Value 0 Related Service Mode SORTER ADJUST SDL SWCH IN...

Page 1000: ...value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution As the value is increased the life of the Stapler is shortened Display Adj Set Range 15 to 15 Unit mNm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FR STP X 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn Fd way Fin G1 Detail To adjust the staple position for paper feed direction in the staple free stapling mode As the value is changed by 1 the staple positi...

Page 1001: ... increased or decreased Increase Decrease When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB enter the value of service label Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key an...

Page 1002: ...ment position is displaced Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key The Alignment Plate moves to the LTR paper width position 2 Set LTR paper on the Processing Tray 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 4 Check the operation of the Alignment Plate 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment ...

Page 1003: ...and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution It will take about 10 seconds until ACTIVE is shown Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service Mode SORTER FUNCTION FIN BK R FIN CON 1 FIN Controller PCB RAM clear Detail To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents ex...

Page 1004: ... U1 Stapler motor Fin G1 10 Swing motor Fin U1 Clinch motor Fin G1 11 Shutter operation Stack ejection motor and shutter clutch Fin U1 Tray shift motor Fin G1 12 Stack ejection lower roller operation Stack ejection motor and Stack ejection lower roller clutch Fin U1 13 Saddle feed motor Fin U1 14 Saddle inlet motor Fin U1 15 Saddle paper folding motor Fin U1 16 Saddle guide motor Fin U1 17 Saddle ...

Page 1005: ... Use Case When clearing the parts counter of the Finisher Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG FR ST RP 1 Ppr dust remov at stpl free stpl Fin G1 Detail To remove paper dust from the stapler the stapler repeatedly executes the staple free stapling operation 30 times without pap...

Page 1006: ...etting mode MD SPRTN 1 Set restriction oprtn at Finisher error Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher Use Case When preferring to run the machine although an error occurs at Finisher Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 is set staple operation or alignment operation is not execu...

Page 1007: ...e SORTER ADJUST PRCS RET Amount of Change per Unit 50 NSRT STC 1 Set stck improve at non collate Fin U1 Detail To set ON OFF of stack improvement mode in non collate mode When 1 or 2 is set paper stack is delivered via the Processing Tray even if it is in non collate mode so the stacking condition can be improved Use Case When the stacking condition at non collating is poor Adj Set Operate Method ...

Page 1008: ...the service mode links the setting of the user mode Amount of Change per Unit 1 DWCL BND 1 Set the lead edge bend prev mode Fin U1 Detail To set ON OFF of leading edge corner bend prevention mode for downward curled paper By selecting 1 the Alignment Plate is moved inward when a leading sheet of a job is fed while there is no paper on the Processing Tray Paper is fed on the Alignment Plate so it c...

Page 1009: ... Mode COPIER OPTION USER TRY STP Supplement Memo When 1 in COPIER OPTION USER TRY STP is set the tray of the inner finisher does not down after paper full detection TRY CRNT 1 Set Stack Tray drive current VL Fin U1 Detail To set the drive current value to lift the Stack Tray with a stack of papers which paper weight is less than the equivalent of 500 sheets of small size paper When 1 is set the cu...

Page 1010: ...sher behaves in non sort mode Set to 1 to enable the staple free stapling without staple cartridge Use Case When utilize the staple free stapling without staple cartridge Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution If a staple cartridge should be left in the finisher with the setting turns to 1 and the cartridge sits unstable error 1C32 or E532 may come out when st...

Page 1011: ...et Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 MENU 3 2 ON OFF printer setting menu level 3 dspl Detail To set whether to display the level 3 of printer setting menu Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main ...

Page 1012: ...3 Voice Operation Kit C2 1078 USB Device Port E4 1090 Voice Guidance Kit F2 Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series 1111 Serial Intreface KIT K2 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 1121 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 1129 Combination of HDD Options 1135 TYPE 1 HDD Data Encryption Kit Installation Procedure 1141 TYPE 2 Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure 1153 TYPE 3 HDD Data Encryption Kit ...

Page 1013: ...t tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking before Installation Following shows requirements for the installation site Therefore it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine to the user s site Checking Power Supply 1 There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated 10 for exclu...

Page 1014: ...0 mm or more 500 mm or more 500 mm or more 500 mm or more 3 Install the machine in a well ventilated location In a location with a mixture of multiple host machines be sure to install the machine where the air exhausted from other machines will not directly enter the machine Also do not install the host machine near an inlet for ventilating the room Points to Note before Installation When installi...

Page 1015: ...No Yes Yes Yes Voice Guidance Kit Yes Yes No No Yes Voice Operation Kit Yes Yes No No Yes Utility Tray Yes Yes No No Yes Serial Interface Kit No Yes Yes Yes No Copy Control In terface Kit No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Installable No Not installable Unpacking Host machine NOTE When installing the Cassette Pedestal at the same time be sure to make the Cassette Pedestal ready before mounting the host machine...

Page 1016: ... below are the minimum space required Thus it is desirable to secure more space for the work than shown in the figure below Configuration of the host machine Height of body 1 Height necessary for work 2 Reader 1060mm or more 2120mm or more Reader DADF 1115mm or more 2300mm or more Reader Platen Cover 1095mm or more 2190mm or more 765 mm 1 1 2 695 mm 2 9 Installation 1004 ...

Page 1017: ...handle a heavy load in each country Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it 4 Remove the tapes from the exterior of the host machine CAUTION Be sure not to remove the Scanner System Fixation Screw before installation of the scanner Only if the reader is installed Be sure to remove the tapes on the Full Sensor in the following procedure Other Installations 9 Installation 1005 ...

Page 1018: ... the DADF Checking the Contents CAUTION The following parts contained in the package cannot be used in combination with these options 4 Reverse Trailing Edge Guide Inner 2way Tray Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher 6 Tray Guide Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher NOTE The Touch Pen is attached to the Control Panel 9 Installation 1006 ...

Page 1019: ...es 2 Sheets Others Including guides Installation Procedure Preparation In the case of simultaneously installing the Cassette Feeding Unit CAUTION The following procedure is for installing the host machine and the Cassette Feeding Unit at the same time When installing them at the same time be sure to make the Cassette Feeding Unit ready before mounting the host machine onto it If the Cassette Feedi...

Page 1020: ...9 Installation 1008 ...

Page 1021: ...ing it down Do not hold the front and rear because the cassette may be damaged NOTE When unpacking Remove the attached tapes and packaging materials Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may differ from the actual things the procedure is the same 9 Installation 1009 ...

Page 1022: ...2 Perform steps 3 to 5 in each cassette 9 Installation 1010 ...

Page 1023: ... without pulling out the cassette Otherwise it may be damaged Trail Edge Guide Plate Side Guide Plate NOTE Remove tapes attached to the cassette and remove the packaging materials 4 NOTE Remove the Fixation Members from the Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 9 Installation 1011 ...

Page 1024: ...5 6 Checking the Contents Cassette Feeding Unit 1x 3x 2x 1x 9 Installation 1012 ...

Page 1025: ... Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit 1 CAUTION If mounting the host machine without opening the Right Cover Lower the cover may get damage 9 Installation 1013 ...

Page 1026: ...ounting the host machine on the Cassette Feeding Unit position the host machine parallel with the Cassette Feeding Unit and fit the 2 Positioning Pins on top of the Cassette Feeding Unit into the holes in the Base Plate of the host machine The maximum weight of the host machine is approx 71 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country Be sur...

Page 1027: ...3 4 NOTE The removed cover will be used in step 6 5 2x 2x 9 Installation 1015 ...

Page 1028: ...6 NOTE Use the cover removed in step 4 7 NOTE Use the cover included in the package of the Cassette Feeding Unit 8 9 Installation 1016 ...

Page 1029: ...r or a coin CAUTION When tightening the coin screws pay attention to plates and parts around the screws When tightening a screw on the rear side be careful not to drop it Be sure to check that the coin screws have been tightened securely 1x 1x 1x 9 Installation 1017 ...

Page 1030: ...te 1 with the rails extended Installing the Toner Container For China and Korea NOTE In the following procedure pictures of a host machine with the Cassette Feeding Unit are used but the procedure is the same 9 Installation 1018 ...

Page 1031: ... color 2 3 Hold the Toner Container black as shown in the figure and shake it approx 10 times CAUTION Be sure to shake the Toner Container with its Toner Outlet white part up or toner may not be properly supplied 9 10 9 Installation 1019 ...

Page 1032: ...ntally with your hand supporting its bottom until approx half of it is inserted 5 Installing the Toner Container Countries other than China and Korea NOTE In the following procedure pictures of a host machine with the Cassette Feeding Unit are used but the procedure is the same 1 9 Installation 1020 ...

Page 1033: ... CAUTION Be sure to shake the Toner Container with its Toner Outlet white part up or toner may not be properly supplied 9 10 5 Align the Toner Container with the insertion opening and insert it horizontally until it stops NOTE Be sure to insert the Toner Container horizontally with your hand supporting its bottom until approx half of it is inserted 9 Installation 1021 ...

Page 1034: ...moving the machine 2x Setting the Cassette 1 NOTE Holding the Guide Plate Lever adjust each Guide Plate to the specified size Adjust the position of each Guide Plate according to the paper size Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever 9 Installation 1022 ...

Page 1035: ... according to the size of paper being set Keep the Paper Size Labels as they will be used when changing the paper size 5 0 mm Setting the Dehumidification Switch Excluding USA and Europe 1 Turn ON the Dehumidification Switch CAUTION If the installation environment is a high humidity environment be sure to turn ON the Dehumidification Switch 9 Installation 1023 ...

Page 1036: ... Turning ON the Power 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel 3 4 5 9 Installation 1024 ...

Page 1037: ... loaded during installation of the host machine Be sure to register the correct paper type Especially in the case of special paper types such as heavy paper registering a wrong paper type may result in image failure and when the Fixing Assembly becomes soiled or paper wraparound occurs repair by a service technician becomes necessary NOTE Initialization of toner supply initialization of the Develo...

Page 1038: ...settings according to the user s request 6 Use IP Address Specify IPv4 and or IPv6 and each IP address 7 DNS Server Address Settings Configure the DNS Server Address Settings the DNS Host Domain Name Settings and the DNS Dynamic Update Settings 8 Proxy Settings Specify the Proxy Settings 9 Country Region FAX TYPE settings Select Country Region 10 Register Unit Telephone Number Set the phone number...

Page 1039: ... of the Setting Value List Informing the System Administrator That Installation Is Complete When the installation is completed ask the system administrator to change the password Also ask the system administrator to keep the changed password in a safeplace to prevent leakage Other Installations 1 NOTE When the 2 cassette Pedestal is installed be sure to install the Right Cover Lower on the 2 caset...

Page 1040: ...2 3 CAUTION When installing simultaneously with one of the following options install the Book Holder to the option Booklet Finisher Staple Finisher 9 Installation 1028 ...

Page 1041: ...d in the Installation Procedure of each option Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher 5 NOTE Clean the position where the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box is to be installed with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Be sure to install the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box to a position after checking with the user where to install it 9 Installation 1029 ...

Page 1042: ...6 7 CAUTION If the machine comes with a Full Sensor remove the tape while paying attention not to damage the sensor 9 Installation 1030 ...

Page 1043: ...Reverse Trailing Edge Guide CAUTION Do not install it if one of the following options is installed at the same time Inner 2way Tray Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher 9 Open the DADF 9 Installation 1031 ...

Page 1044: ...n Label Copy Prohibition Label Finger Pinch Caution Label Only for Latin America Hinge Caution Label Only for Latin America Copy Prohibition Label Cleaning Position Label Hinge Caution Label Finger Pinch Caution Label Only for Latin America Only for Latin America Only for Latin America Only for Latin America 11 Close the DADF 9 Installation 1032 ...

Page 1045: ...usters is not an earthquake countermeasure Installing the Envelope Attachment Envelope Attachment CAUTION The Envelope Attachment is used exclusively with the Cassette 2 NOTE Install remove the Envelope Attachment only if requested by the customer Envelope Standards Type Short side X Long Side Y Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 inch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm No 10 COM10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 inch 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm DL 4 3...

Page 1046: ...When the Kit Is Not Used 1 2 Close the Cassette 2 When the Kit Is Used 1 9 Installation 1034 ...

Page 1047: ...per Settings Cassette 2 Envelope 2 Select the type of envelope to be used and then press OK to register it Display Operation Check 1 Check that Envelope is selected for Cassette 2 on the Control Panel s Paper Settings screen 2 Check that the envelope is picked up Checking the Network Connection Overview If the user s network environment is TCP IP use the Ping function to check that the network set...

Page 1048: ... the following Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP setting IPv4 setting PING command 2 Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press Execute key Response from the host is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while no response from the host is displayed if failed Checking by the Remote Host Address Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check...

Page 1049: ...the following Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP Setting IPv4 setting Ping Command and enter the IP address The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct if the message say Response from the host If the message say No response from the host check the following NOTE When setting the address by manually input set the Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the administra...

Page 1050: ...machine when lifting will result in separation of the machine from the Cassette Pedestal 1 Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured Service Mode Level 2 COPIER Function MISC R RD SHPOS 2 Turn OFF the main power 3 Disconnect the power plug of the host machine 4 f the Cassette Pedestal is installed turn the 3 adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a screwdriver etc to l...

Page 1051: ...sette Pedestal CAUTION When tightening the coin screws pay attention to plates and parts around the screws When tightening a screw on the rear side be careful not to drop it Be sure to check that the coin screws have been tightened securely 1x 1x 1x 9 Installation 1039 ...

Page 1052: ...ng OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing 9 Installation 1040 ...

Page 1053: ...Installation Procedure 1 Install the Copyboard Cover Unit 2 Remove the White Board 3 Place the White Board on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet 9 Installation 1041 ...

Page 1054: ...rd Cover and then open it again 5 Press the White Board upward as shown in the figure below CAUTION If the White Board is pressed downward it is placed on the Index Sheet so be sure to press it upward 9 Installation 1042 ...

Page 1055: ...UTION Be sure that there is no gap between the White Board and the Index Sheet As a guide it should be 0 3 mm or less Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover White Board White Board White Board White Board Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 8 Turn ON...

Page 1056: ...y Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the contents 1x 1x M3x6 1x Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing 9 Installation 1044 ...

Page 1057: ...edure NOTE When installing the 3 Way Unit simultaneously skip step 1 1 CAUTION When the Full Detection Flag is attached remove the Reverse Guide while paying attention to the Full Detection Flag 2 1x 9 Installation 1045 ...

Page 1058: ...3 4 CAUTION Be sure that the Inner 2 way Tray Support Member is installed properly 9 Installation 1046 ...

Page 1059: ... Manager Information Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings ON OFF of Use Optional Output Tray 2 Set the Delivery Tray 2 to ON and press OK 3 Turn OFF and the...

Page 1060: ...ect Tray B for copy and press OK to conduct a test copy 6 Check that the output paper has been delivered to the Inner 2 way Tray 7 Change the tray setting according to the user s request 9 Installation 1048 ...

Page 1061: ...ck Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Checking the contents 1x 9 Installation 1049 ...

Page 1062: ...Installation procedure 1 NOTE The work is the same when the Utility Tray is installed 9 Installation 1050 ...

Page 1063: ...n the model perform one of the following operation CAUTION Because the Copy Tray comes in contact with the rib if installed while laid flat be sure to install it while keeping it upright Rib Rib 9 Installation 1051 ...

Page 1064: ...setting of ON OFF of Use Optional Output Tray can be made only when logged in as an administrator When System Manager Information Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Outpu...

Page 1065: ...on Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings 5 Select Tray B or Tray C for copy and press OK to conduct a test copy 6 Check that the output paper has been delivered to the Copy Tray 7 Change the tray setting according to the user s request 9 Installation 1053 ...

Page 1066: ...terface Kit Copy Control In terface Kit Copy Card Reader yes yes yes no no yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Contr...

Page 1067: ...nnector Cover X 1 10 Card Reader Mounting Plate lower Unit X 1 6 Cord Guide X 2 13 PCB Spacer X 1 12 Connector Cover X 1 8 Screw TP M3x6 X 5 9 Screw TP M3x12 X 2 14 Screw TP M4x12 X 2 15 Screw Binding M4x6 X 4 11 Screw W Sams M3x14 X 2 7 Wire Saddle X 1 Installation Procedure CAUTION After installing the Copy Card Reader enter the card number to be used in the following service mode Level 1 COPIER...

Page 1068: ... Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1056 ...

Page 1069: ...Face Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw upper will be used in step 4 2 1x NOTE The removed screw lower will be used in step 4 9 Installation 1057 ...

Page 1070: ...3 1x 1x 9 Installation 1058 ...

Page 1071: ...4 NOTE Use the screws removed in steps 1 and 2 CAUTION Installation orientation of the Card Reader Relay Unit Be sure to install it in the orientation shown in the figure 2x 1x 5 1x 9 Installation 1059 ...

Page 1072: ...6 2x 7 NOTE Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit and change the position of the cable 1x 1x Lower Cover Groove 8 1x 9 Installation 1060 ...

Page 1073: ...9 Toothed Washer Wire Saddle Boss 1x 1x RS Tightening M4x10 Toothed Washer 10 CAUTION Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle Core Edge Saddle 1x 1x 11 1x 9 Installation 1061 ...

Page 1074: ... Prevention of a fall Be sure to hold the Card Reader Mounting Plate Front Unit with your hand until securing it with screws NOTE Installing the Screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 4x 9 Installation 1062 ...

Page 1075: ...ard Reader External Relay Cable to the host machine and install the Connector Cover 1 Screw TP M3x6 CAUTION Installing the Connector Cover Be sure to insert the Harness Band inside the Connector Cover TP M3x6 1x 1x 9 Installation 1063 ...

Page 1076: ...o not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover A 3x Reader Cable Cover Wire Saddle Exhaust Outlet 20 Connect the power plug to the outlet 21 Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine Routing the Cable when installing this equipment and other options simultaneously Routing the cable when installing the Copy Card Reader and other option...

Page 1077: ...place with the Wire Saddle 4 Install the 2 Cord Guide Covers CAUTION Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover 7x A B Wire Saddle Exhaust Outlet Reader Cable Cover For TYPE 2 When installing the Copy Card Reader and the Voice Operation Kit at the same time 1 Securing the Cable of the Voice Operation Kit 1 Remove the covers of the 7 Cord...

Page 1078: ... RNG 3 Enter the card number to be used 1 to 2001 in the following service mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Enter the smallest card number to be used by the user From the entered card number 1000 cards can be used 4 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting value 5 Insert a card with a card number that has been registered and check that the machine operates normally...

Page 1079: ...ice Operation Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control In terface Ki Card Reader Utility Tray no no yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Checking the Contents 1x 10x 5x TP M4x8 4x 2x TP M4x14 TP M4x10 1x Use 7 of them The parts using to install the k...

Page 1080: ...Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 Remove the all tapes from this equipment 2 2x 9 Installation 1068 ...

Page 1081: ...3 CAUTION To avoid damage do not pull the A part of the Utility Tray too much A 4 9 Installation 1069 ...

Page 1082: ...ion Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks C F I L and O CAUTION Be sure to install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate where it does not cover the USB Slot 5x A Q R S B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TP M4x8 9 Installation 1070 ...

Page 1083: ...6 7 TP M4x8 2x 2x 9 Installation 1071 ...

Page 1084: ...When Installing the USB Keyboard 1 Cap Cover Wire Saddle 9 Installation 1072 ...

Page 1085: ...crews do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Installation Outline Drawing Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug 9 Installation 1073 ...

Page 1086: ...Checking the contents 1x 1x 1x P Tightening M3x12 1x 1x Binding M3x6 Others Including guides IInstallation procedure 1 2 9 Installation 1074 ...

Page 1087: ...A part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when removing the screw 1x A NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 5 CAUTION Be sure to push the Stamp Ink Cartridge in until it clicks Stamp Ink Cartridge Stamp Solenoid 9 Installation 1075 ...

Page 1088: ...6 1x P Tightening M3x12 1x 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 4 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the A part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when tightening the screw 1x A 8 9 Installation 1076 ...

Page 1089: ...ess Finished Stamp key Scan and Send or Fax Other Function Finished Stamp 4 Put an original in the Feeder perform a send test and check that a stamp is printed on the original NOTE Send test method 1 Load paper to the Feeder 2 Press Scan and Send from the touch panel display 3 Specify the destination select Options Finished Stamp Close press the Start Key 9 Installation 1077 ...

Page 1090: ... no no yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned ...

Page 1091: ...Cable Face SealX 1 7 Cord Guide X 7 8 PCB Spacer X 1 9 Screw Bind M4x14 X 2 10 Screw TP M3x6 X 2 11 Screw Bind M3x14 X 1 12 Ring Core X 1 13 Wire Saddle X 3 14 Screw Bind M4x20 X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 12 Use the Ring Core for the External Switch Cable which belongs to the user Others Including guides 9 Installation 1079 ...

Page 1092: ...Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it as shown in the figure 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1080 ...

Page 1093: ...nstall the PCB Spacer 6 Remove the spacers and screws from the Voice Operation Board Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 2 spacers The removed spacers will not be used 2x 9 Installation 1081 ...

Page 1094: ...n in the figure 1 Connector 3 Screws Use the 1 screw removed in step 3 and the 2 screws removed in step 6 1 Screw TP M3x6 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly NOTE Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 2x 2x 1x 8 1x 9 Installation 1082 ...

Page 1095: ...9 2x 10 2x 11 Remove the Face Seals from the Reader Right Cover The removed Face Seals will not be used 9 Installation 1083 ...

Page 1096: ...s The removed screws will be used in step 14 2x 13 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 1 Screw Binding M3x14 1 Screw Binding M4x14 NOTE Installing the screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 2 2x Bind M3x14 Bind M4x14 Bind M4x14 Bind M3x14 9 Installation 1084 ...

Page 1097: ...e screws removed in step 12 NOTE Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow 2x 15 Install the Ring Cores to both ends of the DVI Cable and remove the cap Cap DVI Cable Ring Cores approx 50 mm 9 Installation 1085 ...

Page 1098: ...Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 18 Insert the DVI Cable through the Cord Guides and install the 7 covers of the Cord Guides CAUTION Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover 7x Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet 9 Installation 1086 ...

Page 1099: ...the covers of the 7 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Insert only the DVI Cable through the 7 Cord Guides and install the 7 Cord Guide Covers 2 Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader 1 Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Remove the Face Seal and install the Wire Saddle included wi...

Page 1100: ...4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Navigation at Startup and check that Select Mode at Startup is set 5 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and check that Tune Microphone is displayed 6 Turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine Operation Check When Starting to Use 1 Press Reset key or the Voice ...

Page 1101: ... When Stopping to Use 1 Press Reset key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds 9 Installation 1089 ...

Page 1102: ...ader sales company s option CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check Item when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and the Main Power lamp are both turned OFF and th...

Page 1103: ... X 1 5 DP Sheet for Europe X 1 6 DP Fireproof Sheet X 1 7 Cusion X 2 8 DP USB Cable X 1 9 Screw TP Round End M3 6 X 10 10 Screw Binding M4 6 X 10 11 Screw RS Tightening Round End M3 8 5 X 1 12 Wire Saddle X 1 Use 4 of them 13 Wire Saddle X 1 14 Edge Saddle X 1 9 Installation 1091 ...

Page 1104: ... DP Support Plate X 1 3 DP Support Plate Cover X 1 4 DP Cable Guide Unit X 1 H 1 DP Bottom Cover B X 1 J 1 DP Base Cover X 1 B 1 DP Bottom Cover X 1 2 DP Support Plate X 1 3 DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate H X 1 9 Installation 1092 ...

Page 1105: ...Cable X 1 D 1 DP Mounting Plate W X 1 2 Paper Feed Sheet W X 1 3 DP Shield Plate X 2 E 1 DP Mounting Plate B X 1 2 DP Support Plate B X 1 3 DP Cable Guide Unit X 1 F 1 DP Base Cover C X 1 2 DP Mounting Plate C X 1 3 DP Reinforcing Plate C X 1 9 Installation 1093 ...

Page 1106: ...rocedure 1 Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and open the DADF or the Copyboard Cover 2 Open the Right Door 3 Remove the Reader Front Cover 2 Screws 2 Protrusions 2x Protrusions 9 Installation 1094 ...

Page 1107: ...e Cover to the DP Base 2 Bosses 4 Hooks NOTE Align the 2 hooks A and the bosses in the DP Base Cover with the corresponding holes for the hooks and long holes for the bosses in the DP Base and push the DP base in to the DP Base Cover Installation becomes difficult if the bosses and their positioning holes are aligned first Hook A Hook Boss Hook Hook A 9 Installation 1095 ...

Page 1108: ... Install the DP Mounting Plate to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses 4 Screws Binding M4x6 4x Boss Boss Binding M4x6 7 Install the DP Support Plate Cover to the DP Support Plate 4 Claws 9 Installation 1096 ...

Page 1109: ...8 Install the DP Support Plate Unit to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses 2 Screws Binding M4x6 2x Boss Binding M4x6 9 Install the DP Bottom Cover B 3 Claws 1 Boss Boss Claw Claw 9 Installation 1097 ...

Page 1110: ...all the DP Lower Cover Unit 1 Hook 2 Bosses 1 Screw A RS Tightening Round End M3x8 5 4 Screws Binding M4x6 NOTE Use a stubby screwdriver to tighten the screw A 1x 4x A Binding M4 6 RS Tightening Round End M3 8 5 Hook hole Screw hole Boss Screw hole 9 Installation 1098 ...

Page 1111: ...w The removed screw will be used in step 20 1 Hook 1x Hook 1x 13 Pull out the Power Supply Cable of the Control Panel 14 Install the DP Harness Guide Unit in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 1 Hook 1 Claw Hook Claw Protruson 9 Installation 1099 ...

Page 1112: ...nd Connector Connector 16 Route the Power Supply Cable and secure the connector with the guide A A 1x 17 Remove the USB Mounting Plate Removed USB Mounting Plate will be used in step 19 2 Screws Removed screws will be used in step 19 2x 9 Installation 1100 ...

Page 1113: ...e and connect it to the DP Board 1 Screw TP M3x6 Harness Guide 1x 1x TP Round End M3 6 1x 19 Connect the DP USB Cable which is included in the package to the USB Mounting Plate removed in step 17 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 17 Boss Boss 2x 9 Installation 1101 ...

Page 1114: ...USB Cable mentioned in step 19 by routing it along the Harness Guide 1 Hook 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 12 1x 1x Hook 1x NOTE Route the USB Cable along the groove of the guide A A USB Cable 9 Installation 1102 ...

Page 1115: ... Remove the Transparent Cover using a flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 Hooks Hook Claw 22 Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks 2 Claws Hook Claw 9 Installation 1103 ...

Page 1116: ... fitted in step 28 1x 24 Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet and affix the sheet by aligning it the 3 ribs and pushing it against the Rib A Rib A Rib 25 Place the cushions over the DP Fireproof Sheet NOTE Be sure to adjust the number of cushions 1 or 2 according to how the cable of the Card Reader is stored 9 Installation 1104 ...

Page 1117: ...ation side facing up and by inserting bending the bent bar code area B and the claw Be sure that the Transparent Cover is installed properly B A Hook DP Sheet Claw Transparent Cover 27 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover Protection Sheet 28 Return the Reader Front Cover to its original position 2 Protrusion 2 Screws 2x Protrusions 9 Installation 1105 ...

Page 1118: ...is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator Writing Check 1 Check that Memory Media is set to ON in Settings Registration Preferences Display Settings Store Location Display Settings When it is set to OFF set it to ON and execute Settings Registration Apply Set Chng according to the display 2 Set Settings Registration Function Settings Stor...

Page 1119: ...ck that the Mount Mark is indicated in the bottom right 5 Make the following selection Scan and Store Memory Media Memory Media A 6 Set originals to DADF or Copyboard Cover and press the Scan button Then press the Start button on the Control Panel 9 Installation 1107 ...

Page 1120: ...ompleted press Start Storing Confirm that data is stored in the media and press Main Menu on the Control Panel Reading Check 1 Make the following selection from Main Menu Access Stored Files Memory Media Memory Media A 9 Installation 1108 ...

Page 1121: ... 4 step 5 step 6 of Writing Check and then press the Print button 3 Press the Start Printing button and print the file Then check that the file is printed correctly 4 Press the Main Menu button on the Control Panel 9 Installation 1109 ...

Page 1122: ...Mount Mark in the bottom right Then select the memory media to be removed and press the Remove button 2 Press the OK button Then check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen 9 Installation 1110 ...

Page 1123: ...s Refer to Table of Options Combination when installing this equipment before operation Table of Options Combination Utility Tray Voice Operation Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control In terface Kit Copy Card Reader Voice Guidance Kit no no yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sur...

Page 1124: ...r Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 12 Cable Face Seal X 1 13 Card Spacer X 1 10 Screw Binding M4x16 X 2 Use 1 of them 14 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 7 Screw Binding M3x16 X 1 8 Screw Binding M4x6 X 1 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 Use 1 of them Use 4 of them Others Including guides Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series 1 Voice Guidance Board X 1 9 Installation 1112 ...

Page 1125: ...Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1113 ...

Page 1126: ...Guidance Board Voice Guidance Board for iR ADV C3300 series with Voice Guidance Board 3 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 6 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 7 1 Spacer The removed spacer will not be used 9 Installation 1114 ...

Page 1127: ...e 3 screws removed in the previous step 4x 3x Voice Guidance Board CAUTION After replacement check that you have installed FM1 B870 CAUTION Place the Support late under the Voice Guidance Board 9 Installation 1115 ...

Page 1128: ...7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 5 and step 3 Install the screws in the order from 1 to 3 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly TP M3x6 1x 1x 2x 8 1x 9 Installation 1116 ...

Page 1129: ...9 2x 10 2x 11 9 Installation 1117 ...

Page 1130: ...crews in the order from 1 to 2 Binding M4x16 Binding M3x16 Binding M3x16 Binding M4x16 2x 13 NOTE Installing the screws Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow Binding M4x6 1x 14 50 mm 9 Installation 1118 ...

Page 1131: ...of the Voice Guidance 1 Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Insert only the Speaker Cable through the 4 Cord Guides 3 tall the 4 Cord Guide Covers 2 Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader 1 Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure Use the Cord Guides thick includ...

Page 1132: ...ine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting is ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Guide from Speakers and check that the setting is ON 5 Turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine Operation Check When U...

Page 1133: ... Control Interface Kit Copy Card Reader Serial Interface Kit yes yes yes no no Copy Control In terface Kit yes yes yes no no yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be...

Page 1134: ...Checking the Contents Serial Intreface KIT K2 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x 2x 3x M3x6 Others Including guides Copy Control Interface KIT A1 1x 1x 2x 2x 2x 2x 1x 9 Installation 1122 ...

Page 1135: ...Remove the covers 1 ws 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1123 ...

Page 1136: ...E Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw upper will be used in step 4 2 1x NOTE The removed screw lower will be used in step 4 9 Installation 1124 ...

Page 1137: ...3 3x 1x M3x6 4 NOTE Connect the connector to J14 11 pin and install the Serial RS Conversion Board Use the screws removed in steps 1 and 2 4x 1x 9 Installation 1125 ...

Page 1138: ...e Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x 2 CAUTION Install the extruded side of the D SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure Inside D SUB Support Plate CC VI Cable 9 Installation 1126 ...

Page 1139: ...3 CAUTION Install the CC VI Cable in the direction shown in the figure 4 2x 1x Washer large Spring Washer small Hexagonal Screw Installing the Covers 1 1x 9 Installation 1127 ...

Page 1140: ...2 2x 3 Connect the power plug to the outlet 4 Turn ON the power switch 9 Installation 1128 ...

Page 1141: ... because installing the license before installing the Image Data Analyzer Board causes an error CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel...

Page 1142: ...Checking the Contents 1x 4x TP M3x6 Binding M3x4 1x 1x 4x Others Including guides Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1130 ...

Page 1143: ...3 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screws 4x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 7 4 NOTE Be sure to connect the PCB spacers to improve work efficiency 3x 9 Installation 1131 ...

Page 1144: ...re to install the PCB Spacers in the order of 1 to 4 4x 3x NOTE How to Remove the PCB Spacers Be sure to hold the PCB Spacer and remove the second and the subsequent ones as shown below 1x 6 4x 9 Installation 1132 ...

Page 1145: ...7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 1x 4x 8 1x 9 2x Checking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 9 Installation 1133 ...

Page 1146: ...ch 3 Ask users to install license 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Press Counter Check key on the control panel 6 Press Chk Device Config 7 Check that Image Data Analyzer Board is displayed in option field 9 Installation 1134 ...

Page 1147: ...rson because of security considerations In this Installation Procedure a series of backup or export procedures are described for reference Backup List Backup target data Availability of Backup User excluding DCM Address List Yes Forwarding Settings Yes Settings Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings No Adjustment Maintenance No Function Settings Except for Printer Custo...

Page 1148: ...font No Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF No Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Yes Service Mode Service Mode setting values MN CON No Backup Method Backup target data Backup Method Address List Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import or Export Forwarding Settings Settings Registration User authentication...

Page 1149: ...rs Guide See Table T 1 2 T 1 4 Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure Preparation Service mode setting values should be imported exported by service technicians Execute import export of service mode setting values by either of the following methods a When importing exporting from remote UI 1 Change the setting value of the following service mode to ...

Page 1150: ...tion see the MEAPSMS Administrator Guide Stop of MEAP Applications Disabling Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation 1 Select the URL given below and access SMS http IP address of the device 8000 sms Enter the user name and password select the login destination CAUTION The default password is MeapSmsLogin If a user has changed the password ask the user to change the password again af...

Page 1151: ...rver Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address a user name a password and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up Backup to USB HDD Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to which saved data is backed up CAUTION Data which cannot be backed up If you back up restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing t...

Page 1152: ...data of User inbox document data 1 Select Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Restore 2 Click Display Backup Data 3 Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click Execute CAUTION If you want to restore encrypted backup data enter the same password used when backing up the data Depending on the settings of the machine the backup data may not be completely resto...

Page 1153: ...UTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Kit CAUTION A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If ...

Page 1154: ... power without executing service mode causes E602 5001 procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board When this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER Function INSTALL HD CRYP Check ...

Page 1155: ...Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1143 ...

Page 1156: ...sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 11 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x 2 Open the Wire Saddle and disconnect Power Cable and Signal Cable The removed Power Cable and Signal Cable will be used in step 3 2 Connectors 1x 2x 9 Installation 1144 ...

Page 1157: ...3 Connect Power Cable and Signal Cable disconnected in the step 2 to the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 2x 9 Installation 1145 ...

Page 1158: ...Guid CAUTION CAUTION 1 Installing the cables Be sure to install it in the orientation shown in the figure CAUTION 2 Position to install the Power Cable 270 mm A HDD Pow1 and the Signal Cable 250 mm A HDD Sig Be sure to install each Cable in the position shown in the figure approx 40 mm approx 30 mm 1x 9 Installation 1146 ...

Page 1159: ...able 250 mm A HDD Sig through the hole in the HDD Frame and then connect them to the HDD 2 Connectors 2x 6 Turn over the HDD Frame and attach the Cable Guide to the HDD Frame 4 Hooks 1 Boss CAUTION Be sure that the boss is fitted properly 9 Installation 1147 ...

Page 1160: ...he order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 4x 8 Connect the Power Cable 270 mm A HDD Pow1 and Signal Cable 250 mm A HDD Sig to the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 2x 9 Pass the other ends of the Power Cable and Signal Cable through the hole in the HDD Frame and pull them out as shown in the figure 9 Installation 1148 ...

Page 1161: ...nal Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 1x 11 Install the HDD Frame to the host machine by sliding it 3 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in steps 1 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1x 1x 1x Installing the Covers 1 1x 9 Installation 1149 ...

Page 1162: ... If the PC and host machine have been started turn the main power OFF 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable In case of SST 3 Turn ON the power of the PC 3 Registering the system software 1 Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST 2 Start the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive where the system software has been inserted and click the SEARCH ...

Page 1163: ...ny keys C Return to Menu Reset Start shutdown sequence 0 OK The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically 8 Remove the USB flash drive 9 Turn ON the main power switch Checking the Security Version 1 Press the Counter Check key on the control panel 2 Press the Check Device Configuration key appearing on the control panel 3 Confirm that 2 01 is displayed for the Canon MFP Security Chip i...

Page 1164: ...uration on the Control Panel and show the system administrator that 2 01 is displayed for the Canon MFP Security Chip item Checking That the Security Functions Are Enabled Request the system administrator to refer to the section Checking the Security Mark to confirm that the security functions are enabled each time the host machine is started by checking the security mark Executing auto gradation ...

Page 1165: ...ed portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Draw...

Page 1166: ...dle X 2 3 HDD Warning Label X 1 4 R HDD Label X 1 5 Conversion Connector X 1 Removable HDD Kit AK2 1 HDD Slot Unit X 1 2 Wire Saddle X 2 3 HDD Warning Label X 1 4 R HDD Label X 1 5 Conversion Connector X 1 6 SATA Cable X 1 7 Power Supply Convert Cable X 1 9 Installation 1154 ...

Page 1167: ...Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 3 2x Installing the Removable HDD Kit 9 Installation 1155 ...

Page 1168: ...differ from the actual things the procedure is the same 1 Remove the packing tape and disassemble the HDD Slot Unit HDD Slot HDD Case Execute only in the case of Removable HDD Kit AK2 2 Connect the SATA Cable and the Power Supply Conversion Cable 9 Installation 1156 ...

Page 1169: ...e HDD Kit AK2 3 Remove the Cable Unit and replace it with the SATA Cable of step 2 2x 2x 4 Remove the HDD Frame by sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 14 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x 9 Installation 1157 ...

Page 1170: ...5 Remove the HDD and 2 Cables from the HDD Frame 4 Screws They will be used in step 9 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when removing the screw 4x 1x 9 Installation 1158 ...

Page 1171: ...l these Dampers to the HDD Case 7 Disconnect 2 Cables from the HDD The 2 removed cables will not be used 2x 8 Connect the Conversion Connector to the HDD 1x 9 Install the HDD into the HDD Case 4 Screws Use the screws removed in step 5 9 Installation 1159 ...

Page 1172: ...ION Be sure to affix the HDD Warning Label in the direction as shown in the figure 11 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the R HDD Label and affix it to the space on the top of the HDD CAUTION Be sure to write down the serial number on the R HDD Label in order to show from which machine it was removed and prevent it from being installed to another machine Be sure to affix it on a ...

Page 1173: ... in the correct position as shown in the figure and check that the HDD Case can be inserted all the way and installed properly Unless the HDD Toggle Lever is in the correct position the HDD Case cannot be installed CAUTION Be sure not to trap the Power Cable and Signal Cable during installation 9 Installation 1161 ...

Page 1174: ...13 Secure the Power Cable and Signal Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 1x 14 Install the HDD Frame by sliding it 3 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 4 1 Edge Saddle 9 Installation 1162 ...

Page 1175: ...Connectors 2x 16 Install the 2 Wire Saddles to the Controller Box Frame 17 Secure the Signal Cable and Power Cable in place using the 2Wire Saddles NOTE Fold the Power Cable at the A part and then secure it using the Wire Saddles NOTE Secure the Power Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles Secure the Signal Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 9 Installation 1163 ...

Page 1176: ... A 2x Installing the Covers 1 1x 2 2x 9 Installation 1164 ...

Page 1177: ...3 4 2x Installing the Removable HDD 1 Install the HDD Unit to the HDD Slot 9 Installation 1165 ...

Page 1178: ...hecking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Check that the HDD is recognized Select service mode level 1 COPIER Display ACC STS HDD and check that the manufacturer s name and the model number are displayed 9 Installation 1166 ...

Page 1179: ...essary CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit CAUTION A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the stic...

Page 1180: ... X 1 6 Signal Cable 135mm A Cont Sig X 1 7 Power Cable 135mm A Cont Pow X 1 9 Wire Saddle X 3 3 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 8 Cable Guide X 1 2 Cable Guide X 1 Others Including guides Removable HDD Kit AK1 1 HDD Slot UnitX 1 2 Wire Saddle X 2 3 HDD Warning Label X 1 4 R HDD Label X 1 Use 1 of them 5 Conversion Connector X 1 9 Installation 1168 ...

Page 1181: ... causes E602 5001 mistake in the procedure before installing the HDD Encryption Board to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board If this error occurs the HDD needs to be returned to the non encrypted state 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER Function INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Tur...

Page 1182: ...Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1170 ...

Page 1183: ...n Kit 1 Remove the HDD Frame by sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 21 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x 2 Remove the HDD from the HDD Frame 4 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 8 1 Wire Saddle 9 Installation 1171 ...

Page 1184: ...TION Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when removing the screw 4x 1x 3 Remove the Power Cable and Signal Cable from the HDD and install the Encryption Board 2 Connector 2x 2x 9 Installation 1172 ...

Page 1185: ...NOTE The pictures used may be different from the product in front of you but the procedure is the same 4 Remove the packing tape and disassemble the HDD Slot Unit HDD Slot HDD Case 9 Installation 1173 ...

Page 1186: ...ecute only in the case of Removable HDD Kit AK2 5 Remove the Cable Unit and replace it with the SATA Cable included in the package 2x 2x 6 Connect the Coversion Connector to the HDD 1x 9 Installation 1174 ...

Page 1187: ...them to the HDD Case 8 Install the HDD in the HDD Case 4 Screws Use the screws removed in step 2 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the HDD Place the HDD with the label side facing up and the connector oriented as shown in the figure 4x 9 Installation 1175 ...

Page 1188: ...bel and affix it to the space on the top of the HDD CAUTION Be sure to write down the serial number on the R HDD Label in order to show from which machine it was removed and prevent it from being installed to another machine Be sure to affix it on a flat surface XXXXXXXX Rib Serial No Execute only in the case of Removable HDD Kit AK1 11 Remove the Relay Connector The removed Relay Connector will n...

Page 1189: ...n in the figure and check that the HDD Case can be inserted all the way and installed properly Unless the HDD Toggle Lever is in the correct position the HDD Case cannot be installed 13 Install the HDD Slot to the HDD Frame 4 Hooks 8 Bosses CAUTION Be sure not to trap the Power Cable and Signal Cable during installation 9 Installation 1177 ...

Page 1190: ...14 Install the Cable Guide to the HDD Frame 4 Hooks 1 Boss 9 Installation 1178 ...

Page 1191: ...able Guide CAUTION Position to install the Cable Be sure to connect the Power Cable in a way such that its extra length is approx 40 mm approx 40 mm CAUTION Be sure to route the Power Cable along the bottom of the concave of the Cable Guide 1x 9 Installation 1179 ...

Page 1192: ...ith the Cable Guide CAUTION Position to install the Cable Be sure to connect the Signal Cable in a way such that its extra length is approx 30 mm approx 30 mm CAUTION Do not allow extra cable at the A part in the figure shown below 1x A 9 Installation 1180 ...

Page 1193: ...M3x6 CAUTION Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 4x TP M3x6 18 Connect the Power Cable and Signal Cable to the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 2x 19 Pass the Power Cable and Signal Cable through the hole in the HDD Frame 9 Installation 1181 ...

Page 1194: ...ew Use the screw removed in step 1 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle CAUTION Install the HDD Frame Be sure to install the HDD Frame by holding the cable and pushing the HDD Frame Do not damage the cable with the edge etc during installation Be careful not to drop the screws 1x 2x 1x 22 Install the Wire Saddle to the Controller Box Frame 9 Installation 1182 ...

Page 1195: ...23 Secure the Power Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 1x Installing the Covers 1 1x 2 2x 9 Installation 1183 ...

Page 1196: ...3 4 2x Installing the Removable HDD 1 Install the HDD Unit to the HDD Slot 9 Installation 1184 ...

Page 1197: ...ister Firmware 4 Select the drive where the system software has been inserted and click the SEARCH button 5 Click the REGISTER button 6 Click OK 4 Initializing HDD In case of SST 1 Start the host machine with download mode in safe mode 2 Start the SST 3 Select the model Then select Single and click Start 4 Click Format HDD 5 Select All and click Start 6 Click Execute Format 7 The Format is execute...

Page 1198: ...ns a security chip version that has received CC certification is operating correctly Checking the Security Mark The user can check the security mark displayed on the Control Panel when using the host machine to confirm that security is being protected This security mark is displayed only when an Encryption Board is installed and operating normally The location where the security mark is displayed ...

Page 1199: ...to gradation adjustment When this product is installed the machine initializes its HDD resetting the data used for auto gradation correction Therefore execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing this kit to enable proper images to be output Execution of the minimum installation work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide becaus...

Page 1200: ...APPENDICES Service Tools 1189 General Circuit Diagram 1190 Backup Data 1191 Detail of HDD partition 1201 Soft counter specifications 1203 Removal 1211 ...

Page 1201: ... Used as a probe exten sion when making electri cal checks Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Use for electrical checks CA 7 test Sheet FY9 9323 A Used for adjusting check ing images Reference Category A Must be kept by each service engineer B Must be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be kept by each warkshop Solvents and Oils None Service Tool...

Page 1202: ... 5 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J201 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J202 1 2 3 4 5 J26 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J19 MT1 MT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J18 PIN1 J401 PIN2 J502 J501 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 9 8 2...

Page 1203: ...gs Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear 1 Adjustment Maintenance 24 HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear Function Set tings Except for Printer Custom Set tings Re ceive Forwoard Forwarding Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear 3 Clear 4 Set Destina tion Except for Address Lists HDD Clear Clear Clear Clear Managemen...

Page 1204: ...er Setting HDD Clear Clear Clear Button infor mation in Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Restrict Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Setting items for Main Men Button set tings in Main Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Button set tings on the top of the screen HDD Clear Clear Clear Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Other set tings for Main Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Function Settings St...

Page 1205: ...applications HDD Clear Clear Clear SMS Serv ice Manage ment Serv ice pass word of MEAP HDD Clear Clear 9 Clear Universal data settings Unsent docu ments docu ments wait ing to be sent with the De layed Send mode HDD Clear Clear Job logs HDD Clear Clear Audit Log HDD Clear Clear Clear Management Settings Device Man agement Certificate Settings HDD Clear Auto Adjust Gradation setting val ues FLASH C...

Page 1206: ...ar Clear Clear Backup Restore Method Lists 1 2 Data Location Backup method Backup Method excluding DCM and device information delivery Backup by User Backup by Service Yes No Method Location Compatibility Old model to this model Compatibility iRADV 1 to this model Compatibility iRADV 2 to this model Yes No Method Location Compatibility Old model to this model Compatibility iRADV 1 to this model Co...

Page 1207: ... Yes Yes No Set Paper Informa tion HDD Yes RUI Settings Registration Man agement Settings Data Management Import Export in dividuslly Paper Information PC Yes 19 Yes 19 Yes 19 No Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings HDD Yes 5 RUI Settings Registration Man agement Settings Data Management Import Export A...

Page 1208: ...ttings USB HDD SMB Server No No No No Image data Mail Box Memory RX Inbox Confidential Fax Inbox HDD Yes RUI Settings Registration Man agement Settings Data Management Back Up Restore Settings USB HDD SMB Server No No No No Network Place Set tings HDD No No No No No Web browser settings Web Access setting information HDD No MEAP settings MEAP application HDD No No No No Yes Download Mode Meapback ...

Page 1209: ...No No No Sevice Counter MN CON FLASH No No No No Yes 23 Download Mode Sramimg PC USB HDD No No No Sevice Counter DC CON DC CON No No No No Yes DSRAMBUP HDD No No No Backup Restore Method Lists 2 2 Data Location Backup method Backup Method using DCM Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import Export All Backup by main power OFF Yes No Method Location Compatibility iRADV 2 to th...

Page 1210: ... Main Menu HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes No Button settings on the top of the screen HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes No Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes No Other settings for Main Menu HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes No Function Settings Store Access Files Mail Box Settings Register Box Name PIN Time Until File Auto Delete Printer upon Stori...

Page 1211: ...application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function 9 Since the password is TPM encrypted and saved password backed up after all data settings have been initialized cannot be restored When all data settings have been initialized initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization Reference Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data settin...

Page 1212: ... the Flash so that it can be recovered 24 The following settings are not initialized Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Time Until Stapling Starts Stapler Mode 25 Backup and restoration of data is possible to from the following models only iR ADVANCE C2030 C2025 C2020 Series iR ADVANCE C2230 C2225 C2220 Series iR ADVANCE C250 35...

Page 1213: ...1 FSTDEV 2 Image data storage area Box etc 1 1 1 1 APL_MEAP 3 MEAP 1 1 4 Area that can be ex panded FSTCDEV 5 Image data storage area for Job archive system 1 1 1 1 IMGMNG 6 Manage ment data of image 1 1 1 1 TMP_GEN 7 Storage area of uni versal data temporary file 1 1 1 APL_GEN 8 Storage area of uni versal data Note For details see the follow ing list 1 1 TMP_PSS 9 PDL spool related area 1 1 1 APL...

Page 1214: ...l data Category Data Settings Registration Preferences Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination Management Settings Printer Settings Paper Information Settings Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu Setting for Advance Box Registration information of ...

Page 1215: ...nd white scan color scan No Counter Details 071 Toner bottle black 072 Toner bottle yellow 073 Toner bottle magenta 074 Toner bottle cyan 101 Total 1 102 Total 2 103 Total large 104 Total small 105 Total full color 1 106 Total full color 2 108 Total black and white 1 109 Total black and white 2 110 Total mono color large 111 Total mono color small 112 Total black and white large 113 Total black an...

Page 1216: ...Total A full color mono color 1 150 Total B1 151 Total B2 152 Total B large 153 Total B small 154 Total B full color 1 155 Total B full color 2 156 Total B black and white 1 157 Total B black and white 2 158 Total B mono color large 159 Total B mono color small 160 Total B black and white large 161 Total B black and white small 162 Total B1 double sided 163 Total B2 double sided 164 largeB double ...

Page 1217: ...py full color small double sided 235 Copy mono color large double sided 236 Copy mono color small double sided 237 Copy black and white large double sided 238 Copy black and white small double sided 245 Copy A full color 1 246 Copy A full color 2 247 Copy A mono color 1 248 Copy A mono color 2 249 Copy A black and white 1 250 Copy A black and white 2 251 Copy A full color large 252 Copy A full col...

Page 1218: ...copy black and white large double sided 294 Local copy black and white small double sided 301 Print Total 1 302 Print Total 2 303 Print large 304 Print small 305 Print A Total 1 306 Print A Total 2 307 Print A large 308 Print A small 309 Print full color 1 310 Print full color 2 311 Print mono color 1 312 Print mono color 2 313 Print black and white 1 314 Print black and white 2 315 Print full col...

Page 1219: ...d white large 404 Copy print black and white small 405 Copy print black and white2 406 Copy print black and white1 407 Copy print full color mono color large 408 Copy print full color mono color small 409 Copy print full color mono color 2 410 Copy print full color mono color 1 411 Copy print large 412 Copy print small 413 Copy print 2 414 Copy print 1 415 Copy print mono color large 416 Copy prin...

Page 1220: ...int black and white small double sided 631 memory media print Total 1 632 memory media print Total 2 633 memory media print large 634 memory media print small 635 memory media print full color 1 636 memory media print full color 2 639 memory media print black and white 1 640 memory media print black and white 2 641 memory media print full color large 642 memory media print full color small 645 mem...

Page 1221: ...ile Print small 763 Mobile Print full color 1 764 Mobile Print full color 2 765 Mobile Print black and white 1 766 Mobile Print black and white 2 767 Mobile Print full color large 768 Mobile Print full color small 769 Mobile Print black and white large 770 Mobile Print black and white small 771 Mobile Print full color large double sided 772 Mobile Print full color small double sided 773 Mobile Pri...

Page 1222: ...ssion scan total 6 black and white 937 Box scan color 938 Box scan black and white 939 Remote scan color 940 Remote scan black and white 945 Transmission scan E mail color 946 Transmission scan E mail black and white 959 Media Scan Color 960 Media Scan black and white 961 Application Scan Total 1 962 Application Black and white Scan Total 1 963 Application Color Scan Total 1 964 SuperBoxLocal Scan...

Page 1223: ...lete data Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation NOTE When you perform Initialize All Data Settings license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance Perform...

Page 1224: ...after Initialize All Data Settings is completed Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data Settings upon user s request Operation after Initialize All Data Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data Settings without displaying the message Turn OFF the main power supply on the right side...

Page 1225: ...fail a function to select ON OFF of report output is not provided There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper Only the output of this report remains in the job log Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 Function CLEAR MN CON NOTE When MN CON clear is executed the address book on the HDD is not deleted As for the user data initialize all the da...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands